JP5503119B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when the game medium wins in the winning area (start condition is satisfied) is provided, and the variable display device displays a variable display of the identification information. When the result is a specific display result (big hit symbol), there is one configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

  In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever, and the player By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so-called slot machine).

  In a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which a movable 7-segment display is provided on the front surface of a variable display device and an effect is produced by the 7-segment display (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, during the variable display of one symbol, the left middle right symbol is temporarily stopped (pause. In general, during the pause, the left middle right symbol is displayed so as to shake on the display screen ( There is a gaming machine configured to perform a pseudo-variable effect that is variably displayed again (see, for example, Patent Document 2). In addition, the fluctuation of the symbol between the temporary stop and the final stop or the next temporary stop is referred to as re-change.
JP 2008-17927 A JP 2006-204809 A

  In the pachinko machine of Patent Document 1, there is no relevance to other effects such as pseudo-variable effects, and the effect of improving the effect of the effects is not sufficient.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the effect of production is improved.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a plurality of types of identification information (for example, ornaments) that can be identified based on the start condition being satisfied (for example, No is determined in step S231). A variable display unit (for example, the image display device 5) that variably displays a display result and displays the display result, and the display result of the identification information of the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that is controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the combination becomes a final stop symbol to be combined), and the start condition is satisfied Based on the result, prior determination means (for example, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the specific gaming state before the display result is derived and displayed) 8 and S239, or a part for executing the processes of steps S245 and S246) and a determination result by the predetermining means, any one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns (for example, variation patterns) of the identification information is selected. Variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S261 to S276) and the identification in the variable display section based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means Variable display executing means for executing variable display of information (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 executes the decorative pattern changing process in step S162) and the display result during the variable display. Preliminary effect executioner that performs a preliminary announcement effect to notify that a predetermined display result is obtained. (For example, the portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the notice effect in the decorative symbol changing process in step S162 based on the notice pattern determined in the notice effect setting process in step S516) and the identification executed based on the variable display pattern Revariable display control means for temporarily performing variable display in the variable display section and then restarting revariable display once or a plurality of times from the start of variable display of information to the derivation display of display results. For example, the effect control CPU 120 includes a portion that executes a specific effect of “pseudo-continuity” in the decorative symbol variation process in step S162, and a display unit (for example, the display screen 51). Can be changed to a normal position that does not overlap the front side of the display part and an overlapping position that overlaps the front side of the variable display part Movable display means (for example, movable display device 50) and movable control means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for controlling the movement of the movable display means, wherein the movable control means is the re-variable display control means. The display unit is changed to the overlapping position before the re-variable display is executed by the above, and when the variable display is temporarily stopped, the display unit is returned to the normal position, and the re-variable display is executed. after the display unit executes the control to change the overlapping position again, the announcement attraction executing means, the said announcement attraction in the display unit when the display unit before and after the re-variable display is in said overlapping position ( For example, it is possible to execute a notice effect in the movable display device 50 as shown in FIGS. 69 (E), 70 (A), and 70 (D).

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game media, and a plurality of types of winning identification information that can identify each of them. A game machine in which one game is completed by deriving the display result to the winning variable display unit for variably displaying the game, and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the winning variable display unit. Before the display result of the winning variable display unit is derived, it is determined whether or not to allow each of a plurality of types of winnings including a specific winning accompanied by a transition to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. A winning predetermination means, a winning derivation control means for controlling the winning variable display section to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the winning predetermination means, and a specific winning corresponding to the specific winning The display result is Specific game state control means for controlling to the specific game state when derived to the variable display unit for entry, and an effect variable display unit for variably displaying a plurality of types of effect identification information that can be distinguished from each other, Transition to a state advantageous to the player (for example, big bonus, AT / CT / RT / ART, etc.) when the display result of the identification information for presentation in the presentation variable display unit becomes a special display result determined in advance. Suggesting effect means for suggesting that the transition condition to be established, and effect predetermining means for determining whether or not to make the special display result before the display result of the effect identification information is derived and displayed; The variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern of the effect identification information as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the effect predetermining means, and the variable display pattern An effect variable display control means for executing variable display of the effect identification information based on the variable display pattern determined by the screen determining means, and a display result during the variable display of the effect identification information. Between the notice effect execution means for executing the notice effect for notifying that it will become, and the display of the display result from the variable display start of the effect identification information executed based on the variable display pattern, for the effect Temporarily stopping the variable display on the variable display unit, and then re- variable display control means for performing re-variable display to be resumed once or a plurality of times, and a display unit, and moving the display unit for the effect Movable display means that can be changed to a normal position that does not overlap the front side of the variable display unit and an overlapping position that is a position that overlaps the front side of the effect variable display unit, and the movable table Movable control means for controlling the movement of the display means, and the movable control means changes the display unit to the overlapping position before the re-variable display is executed by the re-variable display control means, When the variable display is temporarily stopped, the display unit is returned to the normal position, and after the re-variable display is executed, the display unit is changed to the overlapping position again. , wherein said it is capable of executing the announcement attraction in the display unit when the display unit before and after the re-variable display is in said overlapping position.

  The advantageous state may be a specific gaming state, or may be a gaming state advantageous to a player different from the specific gaming state.

4. The movable display means according to claim 3 , wherein the movable display means includes a base (for example, a base 90) fixed to the gaming machine, a support member (for example, a support member 53) that supports the display, and the support member. A guide member (for example, guide members 92 and 93) that is movably guided in a predetermined direction and a movable first arm (for example, the first arm) that is pivotally supported by a substantially intermediate connecting shaft (for example, connecting shaft 81). 82) and a second arm (for example, the second arm 83), and a first and a second, which are provided on the support member and movably support one end of each of the first and second arms. And the first and second fixed fulcrum (moving fulcrum 86, 87) and the other fixed fulcrum (moving fulcrum 86, 87) and the other end of each of the first and second arms. For example, fixed fulcrum 84, 85) and fixed to the connecting shaft A transmission member (for example, transmission member 80) and a drive member (for example, motor 70, gears 71, 72, 73, etc.) that drive the transmission member in the predetermined direction, and the transmission member operates. Then, the first and second arms and the support member operate, and the display unit can be changed to the normal position and the overlapping position, and the movable control means drives the drive member. By controlling, the movement of the movable display means is controlled.

In Claim 4 , The said transmission member is provided in the front side rather than the said display part, and the said display part has a connector part (for example, connector 56) which can connect wiring to the back surface side of the said display part.

In Claim 5 , the said base part has a wiring fixing part (for example, wiring fixing part 95) for fixing the said wiring (for example, wiring 96), The said wiring is fixed by the said wiring fixing part, The said wiring It is connected to the connector part via a fixing part, and only the wiring between the wiring fixing part and the connector part is movable from the normal position of the display part with the change of the overlapping position.

According to a sixth aspect of the present invention, the display unit is positioned below the variable display unit or the production variable display unit at the normal position, and is raised by the driving of the driving member to the overlapping position.

8. The display device according to claim 7 , further comprising a rolling surface (for example, stage 60) on which a game ball used for gaming of a gaming machine can roll below the front surface of the variable display unit or the variable display unit for performance. The section is provided between the variable display section or the production variable display section and the rolling surface, and the transmission member is provided in front of the display section and below the rolling surface. It has been.

  In the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the movable display means moves to the overlapping position in response to the re-variation, and the announcement effect is executed on the movable display means, so the interest of the announcement effect is improved.

  In the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the movable display means moves to the overlapping position in response to the re-variation, and the notice effect is executed on the movable display means, so the interest of the notice effect is improved.

In the gaming machine according to the third aspect , a stable operation of the display unit of the movable display unit can be realized by a simple driving member.

In the gaming machine according to claim 4 , since the connector portion for connecting the wiring is on the opposite side of the transmission member and the first and second arms across the display portion, the wiring is provided when the movable display means is operated. The problem of being disconnected can be solved.

In the gaming machine according to claim 5 , when the movable display means operates, the wiring connected to the display unit also moves, and other parts must be installed so that the wiring is not cut. However, since the movement range of the wiring is minimized by the wiring fixing portion, the degree of freedom of component installation is improved.

In the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect , since the display unit raises from below the variable display device and executes the notice effect, the interest of the notice effect is improved.

In the gaming machine according to claim 7 , the empty space below the rolling surface can be effectively utilized.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (below the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed is variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, a decorative design or color design that is a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified in a decorative design display area or a color design display area that is a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three. (Also referred to as “4th symbol”) is variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs and color designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image indicating a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure). In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively.

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, scroll display is performed from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol number, and the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number is displayed. Subsequently, a decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B are arranged. When the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started as the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol (for example, update of the display color) is started in the “left” color symbol display area 5A. Is done. On the other hand, when the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started as the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is started in the “right” color symbol display area 5B. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is finished, and the fixed color symbol that becomes the variable display result of the color symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The color symbols variably displayed in the “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B include, for example, four types of symbols (for example, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, etc.) As long as it is included. Each of the color symbols is assigned a corresponding symbol number. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “4” are assigned to the color symbols “yellow”, “green”, “red”, and “blue”, respectively.

  In addition, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display is based on the fact that the game ball has entered (starting winning) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. The start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative design is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. This occurs when the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  As an example, the start winning storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the One of the display parts that are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) is changed to blue display. Further, when a special ball game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, it is normally not One of the displayed display parts is changed to a red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. Here, in this embodiment, when performing the hold memory display, the number of special figure hold memories based on the establishment of the variable display game start condition can be specified, but the start condition is the first start condition. When it is not possible to specify whether the condition is the second start condition, the display mode of the special figure reserved memory number is changed to a predetermined display mode, for example, by changing the number of display parts corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number to gray. change.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, a special figure hold display unit 25A for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is provided at the lower right of the game area together with the start winning memory display area 5H. The special figure hold indicator 25A has a special figure hold memory number as an effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and a second start formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The number of the second reserved memory as the number of effective start winning balls that have entered the winning opening is displayed in an identifiable manner. The special figure hold indicator 25A, for example, includes four LEDs. The upper two of them correspond to the first reserved memory number, and the lower two correspond to the second reserved memory number. For example, one LED flashes when the number of reserved memories is one, two LEDs flash when the number of reserved memories is two, and one LED lights when the number of reserved memories is three If two LEDs are lit when the number of reserved memories is four, the number of reserved memories can be specified.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilted position by a predetermined solenoid for a normal electric accessory (normally A second start winning opening is provided. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball is unlikely to enter the second start winning opening. It becomes. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the normal electric accessory solenoid is turned on, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening. It becomes a state. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, The second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a predetermined large winning opening solenoid, and forms a large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the ON state, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening. The game ball that has entered the special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower right side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of two upper and lower decorative lamps and the like, and lights them alternately. In this manner, the normal symbol display 20 displays (variably displays) the normal symbols (also referred to as “normal” or “normal”), which are a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols, in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. In addition, the normal symbol display 20 is not limited to this, For example, the decorative lamp (or LED) which shows "(circle)" and "x" is turned on alternately, "left", "middle", "right" Ordinary symbols may be variably displayed by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “” in a predetermined order. Further, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, it may be composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs and variably display normal symbols such as numbers. On the right side of the normal symbol display 20, a general figure holding display 25C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  Further, a stage 60 is provided above the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The stage 60 is formed such that a game ball entered from the stage entrance 61 is capable of reciprocating rolling. The stage entrance 61 is provided at such a height that the entered game ball has energy capable of rolling back and forth on the stage 60. The game ball that rolls back and forth on the stage 60 is discharged from the front side to the game area.

  FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. 2A, the stage 60 is formed of a concave portion 62 and a convex portion 63 having continuously different heights. Further, the stage 60 is provided with a restricting portion 64 that restricts the rolling of the game ball to the rear side. The recess 62 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the front side, and a part of the game ball is discharged from the recess 62 to the front side. A guide groove 65 is formed at the top of the convex portion 63. The guide groove 65 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the front side, and can guide the game ball to the front side (directly above the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The game ball guided in the guide groove 65 is easy to win a normal winning device 6A or a normal variable winning ball device 6B.

  As shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B, the image display as shown in FIG. 2B is performed between the stage 60 and the image display device 5 from the normal position as shown in FIG. A movable display device 50 that is movable up and down is provided at an overlapping position that is a position overlapping with the device 5. The movable display device 50 is provided with a display screen 51 composed of a dot matrix LED (light emitting diode) or the like. The movable display device 50 can move from the normal position to the overlapping position at an arbitrary timing linked to the variable display of the decorative pattern in the image display device 5, display the effect image on the display screen 51, and the ratio that is a big hit (reliability) For example) can be performed.

  FIG. 3 is a six-sided view of the movable display device 50. 3A shows the movable display device 50 in the normal position, and FIG. 3B shows the movable display device 50 in the overlapping position. As shown in FIG. 3A, a case 91 is provided on the front side of the movable display device 50, and is housed in the gaming machine 1 with the case 91 attached.

  FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the structure of the movable display device 50. FIG. 4 shows a state where the case 91 is removed. FIG. 4A shows the movable display device 50 in the normal position, and FIG. 4B shows the movable display device 50 in the overlapping position. In addition to the display member 52 having the display screen 51 described above, the movable display device 50 has a base 90 fixed to the gaming machine 1, a support member 53 that supports and fixes the display member 52, and the display member 52 up and down. The motor 70 which is a driving source for operating, the transmission member 80 for transmitting the driving force of the motor 70, the first arm 82 and the second arm 83 which are movable by the driving force transmitted through the transmission member 80. , Etc.

  The transmission member 80 meshes with the gear 73. In addition, the transmission member 80 is supported by a guide portion provided inside the case 91. By being supported by the guide portion, the transmission portion 80 operates in the vertical direction (vertical direction) as the gear 73 rotates. Moreover, the transmission part is being fixed to the connection shaft 81 which supports the 1st arm 82 and the 2nd arm 83 so that a movement is possible. The first arm 82 and the second arm 83 are moved by the transmission unit 80 operating in the vertical direction.

  The first arm 82 and the second arm 83 are pivotally supported by a connecting shaft 81 so as to be movable with respect to each other. The lower end of the first arm 82 is supported by a fixed fulcrum 84 provided on the platform 90. The fixed fulcrum 84 is movable in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) with the operation of the first arm 82. Similarly, the lower end of the second arm 83 is supported by a fixed fulcrum 85 provided on the base 90. The fixed fulcrum 85 is also movable in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) with the operation of the second arm 83. The upper end of the first arm 82 is supported by a moving fulcrum 86 provided on the support member 53. The movement fulcrum 86 is movable in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) with the operation of the first arm 82. Similarly, the upper end of the second arm 83 is supported by a moving fulcrum 87 provided on the support member 53. The movement fulcrum 87 is also movable in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) with the operation of the second arm 83.

  The support member 53 is supported at the movement fulcrum 86 by the first arm 82. Further, the second arm 83 is supported at the movement fulcrum 87. The support member 53 is not fixed to the base 90 or the gaming machine 1 main body so as to be operable in the vertical direction (vertical direction).

  The base portion 90 is provided with guide members 92 and 93 for guiding the support member 53 in the vertical direction. Grooves 94 and 95 are provided in the guide portion, and guide members 54 and 55 provided on the support member 53 move on the grooves 94 and 95, thereby guiding the support member 53 in the vertical direction.

  Next, the operation of the movable display device 50 will be described. FIG. 4A shows a state when the movable display device 50 is in the normal position. When operating from the normal position to the overlapping position, the motor 70 is driven in a predetermined rotation direction (for example, counterclockwise). As a result, the gear 71 rotates counterclockwise, the gear 72 meshing with the gear 71 rotates clockwise, and the gear 73 meshing with the gear 72 rotates counterclockwise.

  As the gear 73 rotates counterclockwise, the transmission member 80 that meshes with the gear 73 moves upward. Along with this, the connecting shaft 81 fixed to the transmission member 80 moves upward. As the connecting shaft 81 moves upward, the first arm 82 and the second arm 83 supported by the connecting shaft 81 are pushed upward.

  When the first arm 82 and the second arm 83 are pushed upward, the first arm 82 and the second arm 83 rotate around the connecting shaft 81 and the fixed fulcrums 84 and 55 (first Arm 82 and the lower end of the second arm) move inward. Further, the movement fulcrums 86 and 87 (upper ends of the first arm 82 and the second arm) also move inward.

  The unsupported support member 53 is pushed upward by the rotation of the first arm 82 and the second arm 83 and the movement of the movement fulcrums 86 and 87. The display member 52 supported and fixed to the support member 53 is also pushed upward, whereby the display screen 51 is exposed between the stage 60 and the image display device 5, and the movable display device 50 is shown in FIG. The overlapping position is as shown in (B).

  The driving of the motor 70 is stopped when the overlapping position is reached, and the gear 71 and the like are fixed so as not to rotate in order to maintain the overlapping position. When operating from the overlapping position to the normal position, the motor 70 is driven in a direction opposite to a predetermined rotation direction (for example, clockwise), and the entire configuration operates in the reverse direction, thereby returning to the normal position. The drive control of the motor 70 is performed by an effect control CPU 120 described later.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. For example, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate.

  In the normal game using the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as a fixed ordinary symbol, for example, the upper decorative lamp is turned on, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, for example, the lower decorative lamp is turned on, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “universal loss”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”, the expansion / release control is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted, for a predetermined time. When elapses, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position.

  In the special game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the operation is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied, the second start condition is started based on the fact that the second special condition game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has ended, for example.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, after the predetermined time has elapsed, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol variable display result is displayed. Stop display (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result, and it becomes “lost” if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state different from the big hit game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, numbers indicating “5” are jackpot symbols, and “−” is indicated. The symbol is a lost pattern. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 round jackpot symbols, A special symbol indicating the number “1” is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as the first specific gaming state which is one of the specific gaming states controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, a special variable prize is awarded. The opening / closing plate of the ball device 7 opens the grand prize opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is executed. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closed the grand prize opening to play the special variable prize ball device 7 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and finish one round. In the first specific gaming state, release control based on such a first release pattern is executed. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the open cycle of the big prize opening, is the first number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as the second specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is played in each round. The period for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player (the period in which the big prize opening is opened by the opening and closing plate) is a second time (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first time in the 15 round big hit state. . In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) which is smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In the second specific gaming state, release control based on such a second release pattern is executed. In the 2 round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the big prize opening is opened in each round is the second time and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. The other control may be performed in the same manner as in the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous to the player to the first state which is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to return to the second state after a predetermined period (first time or second time) has elapsed.

  In the special winning game state as a third specific gaming state (one-of-a-kind fake fifteen round big hit state), which is one of the specific gaming states controlled after the 15-round big winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game The opening / closing plate of the variable winning ball apparatus 7 opens the large winning opening for a third time (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first time, so that the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is advantageous for the player. After changing to the state, the opening control for temporarily changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the second state which is disadvantageous for the player is performed a plurality of times (for example, twice) by closing the special winning opening. Open control is performed based on 3 open patterns. Then, after the predetermined variable (holding time) special variable winning device 7 is set to the second state, a fourth time (for example, 27.5 seconds) longer than the second time or a predetermined (for example, ten) winning balls are generated. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player by opening the grand prize opening in the period up to. Thereafter, the first round (first round) in the third special gaming state is performed until the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the second state. In the second and subsequent rounds in the third specific gaming state, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 29.5 seconds) longer than the second time. The round that changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player by opening the grand prize opening in the period until ten (10) winning balls are generated is more than the first number of times. It is executed once less (for example, “14”). An opening pattern for controlling the fourth time prize winning opening to the open state is the fourth opening pattern. In this way, in the third specific gaming state, release control based on a plurality of release patterns including the third release pattern and the fourth release pattern is executed. In this embodiment, the third release pattern in the third specific gaming state includes an opening control pattern in which the third opening pattern is the same as the second opening pattern, and an opening control pattern in which the third opening pattern is different from the second opening pattern. There are different types of opening control patterns. In this embodiment, the release control based on the fourth release pattern is executed during the first round, but the fourth release pattern may be executed after the second round. In addition, the fourth time (for example, 27.5 seconds) in the fourth release pattern during the first round is different from the fourth time (29.5 seconds) in the fourth release pattern after the second round. However, it may be longer than the second time, and may be the same time.

  In this embodiment, the 15 round jackpot symbol (“3”, “7”) is used as the confirmed special symbol in the special game when the game is controlled to either the 15 round jackpot state or the stunning fifteen round jackpot state. The special symbol indicating the number is displayed in a stopped state, but different jackpot symbols are displayed when controlled to the 15 round big hit state and when controlled to the 15th round big hit state. You may do it. As an example, when controlled to the 15th round big hit state, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “7” is changed to the big hit symbol for 15 rounds and the special symbol indicating the number “9” is the big hit, as described above. What is necessary is just to newly provide as a symbol, and to make this into the accusative fake 15 round big hit symbol which is stopped and displayed when it is controlled to the sudden fake fifteen round big hit state. In this embodiment, there are prepared a plurality of opening control patterns for the big prize opening when controlled to the 15-round jackpot state. However, each of the opening control patterns has a different 15-round jackpot symbol (for example, “ Special symbols indicating the numbers “2” and “4”) may be stopped and displayed. The big hit symbol is not limited to a symbol indicating a number, and may be a symbol indicating an alphabet or a symbol. In addition, when the winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in each round in the 2 round big hit state is changed to the first state, the first round in the sudden appearance 15 round big hit state Then, the winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed from the second state that is disadvantageous to the player to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the second time after the third time has elapsed. Then, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed from the second state unfavorable to the player to the first state advantageous to the player, and then returned to the second state after the fourth time has passed. What should I do?

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the 15-round jackpot symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, the special symbol variation time (special diagram variation time) in the special figure game is controlled to be a short time state as compared with the normal state. Here, the normal state is a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, a special gaming state such as a short-time state, or a gaming state other than the small hit gaming state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset). In the same manner as in the case where the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. In addition, after the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “3” out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it does not become the short-time state. You may make it be in a normal state. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol controlled to the short-time state or the normal state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is ended. This is usually referred to as a jackpot symbol (also referred to as “non-probable variation jackpot symbol”).

  Out of the special symbols showing the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol, the 15-round jackpot is based on the special symbol showing the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. After the state or sudden appearance 15 rounds big hit state is finished, the 2 rounds big hit state based on the fact that the special symbol which shows the number “1” which becomes the 2 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special game After the completion, as one of the special gaming states different from the short-time state, for example, the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability variation state (probability variation control) in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed ( High probability game state). In this probability change state, the variable display result of each special figure game and the decorative symbol variable display is improved so that the probability that the variable display result becomes “big hit” and is further controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal state. Such a probability change state may be continued until the next variable display result is a “hit” regardless of the number of executions of the special game. On the other hand, after the certainty change state is reached, any one of the conditions that the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is first. You may make it complete | finish when it is materialized. In addition, even before the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times in the probability variation state or before the variable display result is “big hit”, the probability variation state ends at a predetermined rate when the special figure game is started. There may be. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15 round jackpot symbol that is controlled to be probable after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a symbol.

  After the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, an operation of opening the large winning opening for the second time by the opening / closing plate provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is repeatedly executed until the second number of times is reached. In the small hit gaming state, as in the two round big hit state, the period in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second time, and the number of executions of the operation in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second number. It may be controlled so that at least one of them is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the big winning opening is opened by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and the tilting time of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure” The second start condition is easily established by increasing the possibility that the game ball will enter the second start winning opening, such as control for making the time longer than that in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts compared to in the normal state. Thus, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. The control to be performed may be different between the probability variation state and the time-short state, or the combination of the controls to be performed (which may or may not include the same control) may be different.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. That is, in the display area of the image display device 5, each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5 </ b> L is based on the establishment of either the first start condition or the second start condition. At 5C and 5R, variation of the decorative symbols is started, and, for example, the fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of the decorative symbols in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle” are stopped and displayed (derived display). Note that the procedure for stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative symbols is not limited to the procedure for stopping and displaying the decorative symbols in the predetermined order in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, there may be included one that stops and displays a decorative symbol that becomes a confirmed decorative symbol simultaneously.

  In the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, The decorative display variable display state may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. This is a display state that changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the combination. Corresponding to the reach state, a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the display mode of the background image is changed. Or change the variation of the decorative pattern. Such a change in the display mode of the character image, the display mode of the background image, and the change in the variation mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect).

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of decorative symbols may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit” In some cases, a specific effect for informing the player by a variable display mode of a decorative design or the like may be executed. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “sliding”, “pseudo-continuous”, “intro”, “development opportunity”, and “end of development opportunity” are set to be executable.

  In the specific effect of “sliding”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then two or more decorative symbol display areas ( For example, after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “ 2 ”), the decorative symbols are changed again in the decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the“ left ”decorative symbol display area 5L and the“ right ”decorative symbol display area 5R), and then stopped. Thus, an effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed. Here, the temporary stop display is the stop of the decorative symbol that is performed before the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (final stop display) because the variation time determined for each of a plurality of types of variation patterns described later has elapsed. Refers to the display. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display and changing the decorative symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the specific effect of “pseudo-ream”, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols are displayed based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special game is established once. After the decorative symbols are changed in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then all the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C are displayed. The effect display for changing the decorative design again at 5R (pseudo continuous change) can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo ream”, the spurious chance chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The decorative symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed (stopped display or temporary stop display) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “middle symbol” is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of decorative symbols included in the special combination.

  In the specific effect of “Intro”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, A predetermined effect display such as an introduction part of an effect display performed in a reach effect, for example, is performed before the confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (final stop display) at 5C and 5R.

  In the specific development of “Development Opportunity”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right”, and then all the decorative symbols are displayed. After 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the predetermined display effect is started with the variable display state of the decorative symbols as the reach state. The As an example, in the specific effect of “Development chance eyes”, the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 7B are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The decorative symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, when any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, or the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. The expectation of the player is raised.

  In the specific production of “end of development opportunity”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then all decorative symbols are displayed. In the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, an effect display is performed in which a combination of decorative symbols predetermined as development opportunities is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). As an example, in the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, any of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect of “expansion opportunity” are stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  Furthermore, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the specific effect, for example, by displaying the decorative pattern in a display mode other than the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may become a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. In this embodiment, a notice effect such as “movable display device”, “step-up image”, and “mail display” is set to be executable.

  In the notice effect, there is a possibility that the variable display state will be the reach state (the variable display result will be “big hit” or “reach lose”), the variable display result may be “big hit”, etc. Any effect may be used as long as the display result is notified in advance that a predetermined display result is obtained. Further, it may be notified that the variable display result may be “probable big hit”.

  In the notice effect of “movable display device”, an effect display is performed in which the movable display device 50 is operated at a predetermined timing in response to the pseudo-continuous change, and an effect image prepared in advance on the display screen 51 is displayed.

  In the “step-up image” notice effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then two or more decorative symbols are displayed. Before temporarily displaying decorative symbols in the display area, there may be an effect display in which a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order in the display area of the image display device 5. . In the notice effect of “step-up image”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched.

  In the notice display of “mail display”, two or more decorative symbols are displayed after the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the area, in response to the operation button 30 being operated by the player, the effect operation such as changing the effect image display in the display area of the image display device 5 is changed. An effect display is performed.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There is a case where a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination or a fixed decorative symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 in the special combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol showing the number “3”, which is a normal big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol that becomes a 15-round big hit symbol as a final special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol pattern that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is used as the confirmed decorative symbol that is normally a big hit combination. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are an even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). In response to the fixed special symbol in the special figure game becoming the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the variable symbol display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped is displayed. This is referred to as “normal” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the time reduction state or the normal state. Become.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to entering the state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined probability variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed. There is. Here, for example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5 are the fixed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” are “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the probability variable big hit symbol, the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, and then the probability variable big hit combination is confirmed. The variable display mode of the decorative pattern in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is referred to as the “first probability change” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “first positive change”, the game is controlled to the 15th round big hit state, and when the 15th round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. .

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the reach effect different from the case where the variable display mode is “normal” is executed, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect different from the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, The variable display mode of the decorative pattern in which the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “second probability variable” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “second positive change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. .

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is performed, the fixed symbol combination of the normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “normal” is executed, The variable display mode of the decorative pattern in which the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “third probability change” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability change”, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the probability changed state. .

  As described above, when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, the fixed symbol design that is a probability variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed in the variable symbol variable display. , It is determined that the probability change state is reached after being controlled to the 15 round big hit state. On the other hand, when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “third probability variation”, the fixed decoration which is normally a big hit combination in the variable display of the decorative pattern is the same as when the variable display mode is “normal”. The symbol is stopped and displayed. For this reason, when the variable display mode is “third probability variation”, the player cannot recognize whether or not the probability variation state is obtained from the variable symbol display result of the decorative symbols. That is, the confirmed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination is included in the specific display result that is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state, and is included in the special display result that is determined to be controlled in the probable state. On the other hand, the confirmed decorative pattern that is normally a big hit combination is included in the specific display result other than the special display result that is not determined to be controlled to the probability variation state.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. After a “normal” reach effect and a roulette chance effect are executed in response to the state, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-losing combination is stopped or displayed, or a “pseudo-ream” specific effect After the execution of, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped or displayed, or the various decorative decorative symbols are stopped and displayed without the variable display state of the decorative symbol being reached. is there. Note that the chances of success TC1 to TC4 may be determined in advance as combinations of decorative symbols included in the special combination. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. The variable display mode of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is referred to as a “fourth probability variation” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “fourth probability change”, it is controlled to the rush appearance 15 round big hit state, and when the rush appearance 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability change state. Will be.

  When the special symbol indicating the number of “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state After the “normal” reach effect is executed, or after the “normal” reach effect and roulette chance effect are executed, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, After the specific effect is executed, or the specific effect of the “pseudo-ream” is not executed, the fixed decorative pattern that is the predetermined non-reach combination is stopped or displayed, or the decorative graphic variable display state Is not in a reach state, and a fixed decorative design that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 7 confirm ornament symbols to be either 突確 chance th TC1~TC4 shown in (C) may appear stopped. Note that the chances of success TC1 to TC4 may be determined in advance as combinations of decorative symbols included in the special combination. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, various decorative decorative variable display modes in which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Is referred to as a variable display mode of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability changing state.

  In this way, when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “fourth probability variation”, the definite ornament symbol TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 7C is stopped and displayed, After a “normal” reach effect and a roulette chance effect are executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination is stopped and displayed, and after a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, a predetermined non-reach combination is determined. Ornamental symbols may be stopped and displayed. Further, when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “Accuracy”, the confirmed ornament symbol that is one of the accuracy chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed, “Normal” reach effect and roulette chance effect are executed. In some cases, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination is displayed after being stopped, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed after a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. For this reason, when a fixed decorative symbol that is one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in a variable display of decorative symbols, or after a “normal” reach effect and a roulette chance effect are executed, If the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed after the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the sudden appearance is controlled to the 15 round big hit state. The player cannot recognize from the variable display result of the decorative symbol whether the game is controlled to the big round hit state.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “5” as a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the ornament is displayed in the same manner as when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “surprise”. After the variable display of the symbol is performed, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped or displayed, or the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. There are cases where the display is stopped, or a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “5” as the small hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols on which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is as follows. This is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. Here, the finalized decorative symbol that is one of the odd chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 7C is stopped and displayed only when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “probable” or “fourth probable”. When the variable display mode is “small hit”, it is not stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. That is, when the fixed decorative pattern that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display result is “ It will be decided that it will be a big hit. After the variable display result is “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state in which the variable winning action similar to the two round big hit state is performed, and when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed. Therefore, the gaming state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” continues. If it is determined that the probability change state or the short-time state is to be ended in response to the variable display game in which the variable display result is “small hit”, the normal state is returned after the end of the small hit gaming state. Will be controlled.

  When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is any one of “normal”, “first probability variation”, and “third probability variation”, There is a case where a promotion effect during change as a specific change display is executed. In the fluctuating promotion effect, the decorative symbols that are normally the big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. After that, for example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative symbol is changed again, and the decorative symbol that becomes a probabilistic jackpot combination is changed. Any of the decorative symbols that are normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a finalized decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the changing promotion effect is executed corresponding to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or “third probability change”, the temporarily changing display is performed as the changing promotion effect. After changing the decorative symbol again, the promotion promotion effect during changing is performed in which the fixed decorative symbol which is normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the variable display mode being “first probability change”, the temporarily stopped display of the decorative design is changed again as the changing promotion effect. After that, the promotion success effect during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the probability variation big hit combination.

  When the variable display result when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “normal” or “third probability change”, the variable display result is stopped and displayed for 15 rounds. After the control, the jackpot promotion effect is executed as a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probable change state during the period until the 15 round big hit state is finished. Here, the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be a period before the start of the first round in the 15 round big hit state after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or the 15 round big hit state May be a period during which any one of the rounds is being executed, or may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round in the 15 round big hit state, or 15 rounds. A period from the end of the last round in the big hit state to the start of the next variable display game may be used. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or decorative design after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed decorative pattern is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. At this time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect, while the probable change symbol may be stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect image indicating the roulette game is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette entered the “even number” in the jackpot promotion failure production and displayed the effect image “Sorry!”, While the jackpot promotion promotion production was thrown into the rotating roulette. The ball enters “odd number” and the effect image “probability!” Is displayed. In response to the special symbol indicating the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability variation”. By executing the success promotion effect during the big hit before the big hit gaming state is finished, it is notified that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state. Corresponding to the special symbol showing the number “3” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special figure game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, By the time the gaming state ends, the success promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, and there is no notification that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, the color symbol in the “left” color symbol display area 5 A corresponding to the variable symbol special symbol display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4 A. The variable display is performed, and the variable display of the symbol in the “right” color symbol display area 5B is performed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is called. Then, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A, the fixed color symbol is stopped and displayed in the “left” color symbol display area 5A. The As an example, when a special symbol indicating a number of “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, the “left” color symbol display area is displayed. In 5A, the color design indicating “yellow” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color design. In addition, when any of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7”, which are the 15-round jackpot symbols, is stopped and displayed as the special symbol for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, “Left In the color symbol display area 5A, the color symbol indicating “red” is stopped and displayed as the determined color symbol. Furthermore, when a special symbol indicating a “-” symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, it is confirmed in the “left” color symbol display area 5A. A color design indicating “blue” as a color design is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, the “left” color symbol display area is displayed. In 5A, the color design indicating “green” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color design. If any of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special symbol game using the second special symbol, In the color symbol display area 5B, the color symbol indicating “red” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color symbol. When a special symbol indicating a “-” symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the second special symbol, the fixed color symbol is displayed in the “right” color symbol display area 5B. As a result, the color design indicating “blue” is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that a color pattern different from that in the other 15 round big hit states may be displayed in the sudden appearance 15 round big hit state.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 5 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 is mounted with, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as the game effect lamp 9 and the movable display device 50 are mounted. In other words, the effect control board 12 is a display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 9, etc., movable display A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation such as the operation of the device 50 and the production operation on the display screen 51 is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first and second starter switches 22 </ b> A and 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first and second starter switches 22A and 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. Further, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the like.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 8A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, a prior determination result indicating whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is Different EXT corresponding to the big hit type determination result of whether the decorative display variable display mode in the case of “big hit” is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, or “surprise probability” Data is set. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “first probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “second probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “third probability variation” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “fourth probability variation” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C06H is a seventh variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “surprise” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C07H is an eighth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5.

  A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the preliminary determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a command for opening a big prize opening for 15 rounds, which designates display of an effect image during a period in which the big prize opening is open in each round, corresponding to the 15 rounds big hit state. Command A2XXH designates display of an effect image (for example, an effect image in an interval between rounds) during a period in which the big prize opening is changed from an open state to a closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the 15 round big hit state. This is a designation command for the round jackpot after opening the big prize opening. In the special command for opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state. Is set.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the prior determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. .

  Command A4XXH corresponds to the two-round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, and the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “small hit”. This is a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening for the accuracy and small hitting that designates the display of the effect image during the period when the big prize opening is in the open state in each round or variable winning action. Command A5XXH specifies the display of the effect image during the period when the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state by the end of each round or variable winning action corresponding to the two round big hit state or the small hit game state. This is a command that is designated after opening the big prize opening for small hits. In the command for opening the big prize opening for the accuracy / small hit and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the round in the big win state or the small hit game state (for example, “1” or “2” )), Different EXT data is set.

  The command A6XXH is a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening for the sudden appearance that specifies the display of the effect image during the period in which the big prize opening is open in each round, corresponding to the big hit state of the 15th round. . Command A7XXH specifies display of effect images (for example, effect images in the interval between rounds) during the period when the big prize opening changed from the open state to the closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the 15-round big hit status This is a command to specify after the opening of the big winning opening for a masquerade. In the command for opening the prize winning opening for the surprise appearance and the designation command after opening the prize winning opening, for example, different EXT corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the state of the big hit 15 rounds. Data is set.

  The command B001H is for executing a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. This is a first start port winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied. The command B002H is for executing a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition is established.

  The command C0XXH is used to display the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 or the like. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value of. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the reserved memory count notification command, for example, the total number of stored data (for example, “1” to “8”) of the reserved data in the first special figure reserved storage unit 151A and the second special figure reserved storage unit 151B shown in FIG. Alternatively, different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of start data stored in the start data storage unit 151C (for example, “1” to “8”). Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the first special drawing is received. The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A random access memory (RAM) 102 that provides an area, a central processing unit (CPU) 103 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and I / O (Input / Output port) 105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  In the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 5 counts numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type, and a random value MR2 for determining the reach 2. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104 and indicates the other random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4. The numerical data may be updated by software using the random counter by the CPU 103. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit game state, and whether the variable display result is the “small hit” or not. This is a random value used to determine whether or not to control the gaming state, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”, for example.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the random display value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, “surprise probability” Is a random number value used to determine one of the big hit types as the plurality of types of specific variable display types, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The reach determination random number value MR2-2 is a random number value used to determine whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “239”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used for determining the variation pattern type of the decorative design as any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, a range of “1” to “241”. Takes the value of The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “251” is used. Take.

  FIG. 10 shows variations in decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of decorative symbols is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates a pattern. As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-7 and non-reach PB1- are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-10, super PB3-1 to super PB3− are the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol display mode is “reach”. 6. Variation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. As shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 and super PA4 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. -1 to super PA4-10, super PA5-1 to super PA5-5, super PB4-1 to super PB4-5, super PB5-1 to super PB5-5, super PC4-1 and super PC4-2, super PD1 -1 and Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 and Super PE1-2, Super PF1-1 to Super PF1-3, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-6, Special PG2-1, Special PG2-2, Special PG3 -1 Fluctuation pattern of special PG3-3, special PH1-3, special PH1-5, special PH3-1 to special PH3-3 Emissions are prepared.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 5 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 12A and a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. . The first special figure display result determination table 130A has a variable display result before a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” and whether to control the small display game status as “small hit” based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table referred to for determination. The first special figure display result determination table 130A has a random number MR1 for determining a special figure display result depending on whether the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. 25 is off or on. Are set data (determination data), etc., associated with (assigned to) big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, and loss determination value data. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shows the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special figure display result decision table 130B decides to assign the random value MR1 for special figure display result determination to the big hit determination value data or the loss determination value data depending on whether the probability variation flag is OFF or ON. Data.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes a jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type determination table 131 sets the variable symbol display mode of the decorative symbols as “normal”, “based on the random number MR2-1 for determining the big hit type. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation” and “surprise probability”. The jackpot type determination table 131 indicates whether the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 25 is “1” or “2”. Correspondingly, the random number MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is composed of determination data assigned to the big hit types of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, and “surprise probability”. Further, the jackpot type determination table 131 determines the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 25 (the jackpot type buffer value) based on the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type. Table data (setting data) for setting to any one of “00” to “07” corresponding to the jackpot type is included.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13, three types of jackpot types having different jackpot type buffer values are prepared as “fourth probability variation”. “4th probability variation (04)”, “4th probability variation (05)”, and “4th probability variation (06)” are all big hits that are 15 round round big hits, but the opening control pattern of the big prize opening is Each is different. Here, “fourth probability variation (04)” and “fourth probability variation (05)” are release control patterns similar to the second release pattern when the third release pattern is “probability”. On the other hand, the “fourth probability variation (06)” is an opening control pattern different from the second opening pattern when the third opening pattern is “probability”. In the setting of the jackpot type determination table 131, “82” to “84” when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” among the random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination is “fourth probability variation (04)”. Is assigned to the jackpot type of “4th probability variation (05)”, while the value of “86” is assigned to the jackpot type of “fourth probability variation (06)”. It is done. In other words, the ratio of the big hit type that opens the big winning opening similar to the “surprise accuracy” in “the fourth probability variation” increases. In this way, the player recognizes whether the control is controlled to the 15th round big hit state ("4th probability change") or the 2nd round big hit state ("crash probability") from the winning pattern opening pattern. The percentage that cannot be increased. Thereby, even if the opening pattern is the same as the “accuracy”, it is possible to increase the possibility of being controlled to the accusation foul 15 round big hit state and to improve the player's expectation. In addition, by providing a jackpot type ("fourth odd variation (06)") that allows the player to recognize from the opening pattern of the big winning opening that the player is controlled to a stubborn 15 round jackpot state, The fun of recognizing the type of jackpot from the opening pattern of the big prize opening can be enjoyed, so the fun of the game can be improved. When the allocation of the “fourth probability variation” as the jackpot type is reduced (for example, when only the allocation “82” of the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type is used), the “fourth probability variation” is selected as the jackpot type. After the determination, the second step determination may be performed to determine the big hit type buffer value.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 13, depending on whether the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, the jackpot type of “fourth probability variation” or “surprise probability” is determined. The allocation of the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type for is different. That is, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, “82” to “86” of the random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination are assigned to the jackpot type of “fourth probability variation”, When the value in the range of “87” to “100” is assigned to the jackpot type of “surprise accuracy” and the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, “4th probability variation”, “surprise accuracy” The random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is not assigned to the big hit type. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the ratio of determining the big hit type as “fourth probability variation” or “surprising accuracy” can be varied.

  The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M shown in FIGS. 14 (A) to (G) and FIGS. 15 (A) to (E). When the determination that the variable display result is “big hit” is made, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M change the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the big hit type for the variation pattern type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M is, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Depending on the determination result of the jackpot type and the total number of reserved storage, it is selected as a use table. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M has a variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, or “surprise probability”. The random number MR3 for determination is changed to normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, super CB3-1 to super CB3-5, special CA4-1 to special CA4-3, special CA5-1, special CA5. -2, decision data to be assigned to any of the variation pattern types of special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CB5-1, special CC4-1 to special CC4-3, special CC5-1, special CC5-2, etc. It is composed of

  Here, as an example, paying attention to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, the big hit shown in FIG. 14 (A) used when the big hit type is “normal” or “third probability variation”. The normal variation pattern type determination table 132A and the large variation pattern type determination table 132B for big hits shown in FIG. 14B used when the big hit type is “first probability variation” include normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2. The assignment of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the variation pattern type is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3 is assigned. The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type -4. In this way, paying attention to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the variation pattern type determination table for big hit that is selected according to the big hit type in the gaming state 132A to 132E (selected in the normal state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132F to 132J (selected in the probable variation state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132D, 132K, 132M (short-time state) (When selected) are compared with each other, the allocation of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type differs depending on the jackpot type, and also varies for different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. A random value MR3 for pattern type determination is assigned. As a result, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the determination result as to which of the plurality of types of jackpot types, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type.

  In particular, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132I, and 132K used when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, for example, special CA5-1, special CA5-2, special CB5-1, and special CC5-1. When the jackpot type is other than “fourth probable variation”, such as special CC5-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is compared with the variation pattern type to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned. Is assigned. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability change”, when controlling to the 15 round big hit state, the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state or the 2 round big hit state The variation pattern type can be determined differently from the case of controlling to the state.

  In the setting of the variation pattern type determination table 132D for big hits used when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the variation corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “4” Corresponding to the case where all of the random numbers MR3 for pattern type determination are assigned to the variation pattern type of special CA5-1, while the total number of reserved storages is any one of “5” to “8”. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is all assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CA5-2. For this reason, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the total number of reserved storage is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”). If there is, the variation pattern type of the special CA 5-1 is determined. On the other hand, if the total number of reserved storage is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the variation pattern type of the special CA 5-2 is determined.

  Further, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I, even when the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “8”, the variation pattern type of the special CB5-1 is changed to the variation pattern type determination variation. All of the numerical values MR3 are assigned. For this reason, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probable change”, the total number of reserved storage is any of “0” to “8”. Even if it exists, the variation pattern type of special CB5-1 is determined.

  In the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132K, all of the random numbers MR3 for variation pattern type determination correspond to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “4”. While allotted to the variation pattern type of the special CC 5-1, the random number MR 3 for variation pattern type determination is all corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”. Is assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CC5-2. For this reason, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the short-time state and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the total number of reserved storage is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”). If there is, the variation pattern type of the special CC 5-1 is determined. On the other hand, if the total reserved storage number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the variation pattern type of the special CC 5-2 is determined.

  Furthermore, in the setting of the variation pattern type determination table 132E for big hits used when the big hit type is “surprise”, the change corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “4” Among the random values MR3 for pattern type determination, values in the range of “1” to “200” are assigned to the variation pattern types of the special CA4-1, while values in the range of “201” to “241”. Is assigned to the variation pattern type of special CA4-2. On the other hand, corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is any one of “5” to “8”, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is in the range of “1” to “180”. While the value is assigned to the variation pattern type of special CA4-1, the value in the range of “181” to “241” is assigned to the variation pattern type of special CA4-3. For this reason, when the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the short-time state and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, if the total number of reserved storage is less than a predetermined number (eg, “5”) On the other hand, if one of the variation pattern types of special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 is determined, and the total number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the variation pattern of either special CA4-1 or special CA4-3 The type will be determined. In addition, with such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “5”) or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 is smaller than when the total number is less than the predetermined number. Lower.

  Further, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132J used when the big hit type is “surprise”, even when the total number of stored storage is “0” to “8”, the fluctuation pattern type determination Among the random number values MR3 for use, values in the range of “1” to “150” are assigned to the variation pattern types of the special CB4-1, while values in the range of “151” to “241” are the special CB4. -2 variation pattern type. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable change state, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the total number of stored storage is any of “0” to “8”. Also, the variation pattern type of either the special CB4-1 or the special CB4-2 is determined.

  Then, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132M, in response to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “4”, among the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, “ The value in the range of “1” to “175” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CC4-1, while the value in the range of “176” to “241” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CC4-2. ing. On the other hand, corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is any one of “5” to “8”, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is in the range of “1” to “150”. While the value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1, the value in the range of “151” to “241” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-3. For this reason, when the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the short-time state and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, if the total number of reserved storage is less than a predetermined number (eg, “5”) On the other hand, if any of the variation patterns of the special CC 4-1 and the special CC 4-2 is determined, and the total number of reserved storage is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the variation pattern of either the special CC 4-1 or the special CC 4-3 The type will be determined. In addition, with such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “5”), the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the special CC4-1 is smaller than when the total number is less than the predetermined number. Lower.

  As another example, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132J, and 132M used when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2 , Special CA4-3, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, special CC4-2, special CC4-3, the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is other than "surprise" In this case, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the control is made to the two round big hit state, the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state or the sudden appearance fake 15 round big hit state, Can be determined for different variation pattern types.

  As another example, focusing on the case where the jackpot type is determined to be “normal”, the jackpot shown in FIG. 14 (A) used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state. In the variation pattern type determination table 132A for use and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132F shown in FIG. 14 (F) used when the gaming state is in a probable variation state, the variation patterns of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 are used. The assignment of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the type is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132F, the super CA3. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. In this way, paying attention to the case where the jackpot type is determined as one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, or “surprise probability”, it is selected according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132F (selected when “normal” or “third probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132G (selected when “first probability variation”), Big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C, 132H (selected when “second probability variation”), big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, 132I (selected when “fourth probability variation”), big hit variation pattern type determination Comparing the tables 132E, 132J, and 132M (selected when “probable”) with each other, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the time reduction The allocation of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type is different depending on whether it is the probability variation state or the like, and the variation pattern type is different for the variation pattern type depending on the gaming state. A random number value MR3 for determination may be assigned. This makes it possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, and is determined to be the same variation pattern type. The ratio can be varied.

  The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. The small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is “small hit”, a plurality of variation pattern types are selected based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. In each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. 16D, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state Is selected as a use table. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is for determining that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of the special CA4-1, the special CB4-1, and the special CC4-1. It consists of data.

  Here, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133A for small hits shown in FIG. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. In the variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133B for small hits shown in FIG. 16B, the big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132J. In the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133C for small hits shown in FIG. 16C, the big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132M. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. 14 (E) and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132J shown in FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132M shown in E) is set to include a variation pattern type common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”, and the reach determination random number MR2- 2 is a table referred to for determination based on 2. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C is used depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C are used to determine the reach determination random number MR2-2 as non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, Determination to be assigned to any one of the determination result indicating that the reach state is not reached such as non-reach HC1-2 and the determination result indicating the reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 Data.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 17A, corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”, among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination, “1” to A value in the range of “204” is assigned to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, while a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the determination result of the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1”, “1” to “217”, which are larger than the number of random number values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. Is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA1-2. Furthermore, corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “2”, the number of random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination is larger than the number of random values assigned to non-reach HA1-1 and non-reach HA1-2. A value in the range of “1” to “220” is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA1-3. The non-reach HA1 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination corresponding to each of the case where the total number of reserved storage is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. A value in the range of “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of random numbers assigned to each of the determination results of −1 to non-reach HA 1-3, is used as the determination result of non-reach HA 1-4 or non-reach HA 1-5. assign. With this setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, “3”), it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “reach”, the total When the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random number MR3 for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table in accordance with a determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a usage table according to the determination results of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B according to the determination result of the reach HB2-1. Is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type determination table for reach 135C is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result of the reach HC2-1. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a reach determination result indicating whether the reach state is reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is composed of data for determination assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. Has been.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 18A, “1” to “1” in the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-1. A value in the range of “128” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, while other random values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1 in the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. Further, according to the determination result of reach HA2-3, a value in the range of “1” to “182” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1 among the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. The determination result of the reach HA 2-1 indicates that the reach determination random number MR2-2 corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0” by the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. Assigned. As the determination result of the reach HA 2-2, the random number value MR2-2 for the reach determination is assigned corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1” or “2”. The determination result of reach HA2-3 indicates that the total pending storage number is either “3” or “4” or any of “5” to “8”. A random value MR2-2 is assigned. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1”) or more, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the “normal” reach production is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production other than “normal”. If so, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure variation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate that when it is determined that the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not the reach state, the variation pattern type is determined based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C include non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, and non-reach HC1-2. It is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA 1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 and non-reach HC1-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined as non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-. 3. It is comprised from the data for determination etc. which are allocated to one of the variation pattern types of non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D shown in FIGS. 20, 21A and 21B, and FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D display the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, and the variation pattern type is super CB3. -1 to Super CB3-5, the hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table according to the determination result, and the variation pattern types are special CA4-1 to special CA4-3, special CB4-1, The hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CB4-2 and the special CC4-1 to the special CC4-3 is used, and the variation pattern type is the special CA5-1 or the special CA5-. 2, Special CB5-1, Special CC5-1, Special CC5-2 Per variation pattern determination table 137D according to the determination result to the effect that is selected as the usage table. Each of the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D has a random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and a plurality of variations corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It consists of decision data assigned to one of the types of variation patterns.

  Here, in the setting of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137A shown in FIG. 20, "normal" reach effects such as normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 are provided corresponding to the case where the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA3-1. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern to be executed. Corresponding to the variation pattern type of super CA 3-2, the variation pattern for executing reach effect α1 such as super PA4-1 to super PA4-5 and the reach effect such as super PA4-6 to super PA4-10. A random value MR for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. In response to the variation pattern types of Super CA3-3 and Super CA3-4, reach effects β1 such as Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-5, Super PC4-1, Super PD1-1, and Super PD1-2 are provided. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern to be executed. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA 3-5, random number value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern for executing reach effect α3 such as super PB5-1 to super PB5-5. Yes. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of Super CA 3-6, the variation pattern is changed to the variation pattern that executes the effect of determining the probability variation big hit such as Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-5, Super PE1-1, Super PE1-2. A random number value MR4 for determination is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of Super CA 3-7, a random value for variation pattern determination is added to the variation pattern that executes the “development chance” specific effects such as Super PC 4-1 and Super PC 4-2. MR4 is assigned. Corresponding to the variation pattern type of Super CA 3-8, the variation pattern changes to a variation pattern that executes a reach effect β3 such as PF1-1 or a variation pattern that executes a roulette chance effect such as PF1-2 or PF1-3. A random number MR4 for pattern determination is assigned.

  Further, in the setting of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137B shown in FIG. 21A, the reach effect β1 such as the super PB4-1 to the super PB4-5 is executed corresponding to the case where the change pattern type is the super CB3-1. The random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-2, the variation pattern determination random number value for executing the reach effect β 1 and the roulette effect such as the super PD 1-1 and the super PD 1-2. MR4 is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-3, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern that executes the reach effect β2 such as the super PB5-1 to the super PB5-5. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-4, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern such as the super PC 4-1 and the super PC 4-2. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-5, a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is included in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β2 and the roulette effect such as the super PE1-1 and the super PE1-2. Assigned.

  With such a setting, for example, with reference to the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, whether the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1 or other variation pattern types. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the “normal” reach effect. When the variation pattern type of normal CA3-1 is determined, one of the variation patterns of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 is referred to with reference to the hit variation pattern determination table 137A shown in FIG. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific effect of “slip”.

  In addition, as a variation pattern type other than the normal CA 3-1, for example, when the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-2 is determined, referring to the hit variation pattern determination table 137 A shown in FIG. By determining one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA 4-10, whether or not to execute a specific effect, whether to execute a specific effect of “slip”, “pseudo-run”, or “intro”, for example, It is possible to determine the type of the specific effect such as the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation in the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous”, and to stop the display of the decorative symbol that is a big hit combination in the first stage effect display (temporary stop Execute the reach effect α1 in which the decorative pattern to be displayed (including the display) appears, or stop the decorative symbol that is a big hit combination in the second stage effect display Can temporary stop including display) by the decoration pattern to determine whether to perform the reach demonstration α2 appearing.

  However, when the jackpot type is “second probability change”, for example, a specific effect of “Development Chance Eye” is executed in order to cause a certain probability change jackpot appearance to appear at a certain rate regardless of the type of reach effect. Variation pattern types (for example, variation pattern types of super CA 3-7 and super CB 3-4) are provided.

  In the setting of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137C shown in FIG. 21B, special PG1-1, special PG1-2, special PG1-6, special PG2 corresponding to the case where the fluctuation pattern type is special CA4-1. The random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern that is used even when the variable display result is “small hit” such as −1 and special PG2-2. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of special CA4-2, the variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all revariable display operations such as special PG1-3 are performed twice, or special PG1- 4, a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “pseudo-ream” in which the all-revariable display operation is performed three times, a variation pattern that stops and displays a decorative pattern that is one of the odd chance items TC1 to TC4, such as special PG3-1 The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern that is used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. On the other hand, corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of special CA 4-3, a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all re-variable display operations such as special PG 1-5 are performed, Fluctuations that are used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, such as a variation pattern in which a decorative symbol that is one of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 such as special PG3-1 is stopped. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CB4-1, the random value for variation pattern determination is used as the variation pattern used even when the variable display result such as the special PG2-1 is “small hit”. MR4 is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CB4-2, the roulette chance effect for selecting the effect that develops later, such as the special PG3-2 and the special PG3-3, is executed and developed. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for selecting a stunning effect as an effect. Also, the variable display results such as special PG1-1, special PG1-2, special PG1-6, special PG2-1, and special PG2-2 correspond to the case where the variation pattern type is special CC4-1. A random number value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern that is also used in the case of “winning”. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CC4-2, a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all revariable display operations such as the special PG1-3 are performed twice, a special PG1-4, etc. Variable such as a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-ream” in which the all-revariable display operation is performed three times, and a variation pattern for stopping and displaying a decorative pattern that is one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4 such as special PG3-1. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern that is used only when the display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. On the other hand, in response to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-3, a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all re-variable display operations such as the special PG 1-5 are performed, Fluctuations that are used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, such as a variation pattern in which a decorative symbol that is one of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 such as special PG3-1 is stopped. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern.

  Further, in the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137D shown in FIG. 22, the “pseudo-continuous display operation” in which the total re-variation display operation such as the special PH1-3 is performed twice corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CA5-1. "A variation pattern that executes a specific effect", a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of "pseudo-ream" in which all re-variable display operations such as special PH1-4 are performed three times, and a random chance item TC1 to TC4 such as a special PH3-1 A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for stopping and displaying any of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of special CA5-2, the variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all re-variable display operations such as special PH1-5 are performed, A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for stopping and displaying a decorative symbol that is one of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 such as the special PH 3-1. In addition, in response to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CB5-1, a roulette chance effect such as a special PH 3-2 and a special PH 3-3 for selecting an effect that develops later from a plurality of types is executed, A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for selecting a surprise effect as an effect to be developed. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type of the special CC 5-1 is selected, a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which the entire re-variable display operation such as the special PH1-3 is performed twice, a special PH1-4, etc. Fluctuate to a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “pseudo-ream” in which all re-variable display operations are performed three times, or a variation pattern that stops and displays a decorative pattern that is one of the special chance items TC1 to TC4 A random number MR4 for pattern determination is assigned. On the other hand, in response to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CC 5-2, the variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all re-variable display operations such as the special PH 1-5 are performed, A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for stopping and displaying a decorative symbol that is one of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 such as the special PH 3-1.

  Here, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the variation pattern type is determined from the gaming state and the total number of reserved storage. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the ratio that varies depending on the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories by assigning the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type The variation pattern type used even when the variable display result is “small hit” or the variable pattern type used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” Is determined. Here, in the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, roulette chance effect, Any of the effects that temporarily display the decorative symbol that is one of the chances TC1 to TC4 and develop from there is executed. In the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type used even when the variable display result is “small hit”, any of the effects is not executed.

  With such setting, for example, after referring to the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132E, and 132I to 132M shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. With reference to the hit variation pattern determination tables 137C and 137D shown in (B), by determining the variation pattern, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, and to store the total hold Corresponding to the number, the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation can be determined. That is, when the total number of reserved storages is “0” to “4”, when it is determined to execute the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, 1 is determined as the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation. Is done. On the other hand, when it is determined that the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is to be executed in the case where the total number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”, the total number of re-variable display operations is 2 One or three times is determined.

  Here, the change pattern determined with reference to the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137C shown in FIG. 21B and the change pattern determined with reference to the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137D shown in FIG. The production operations having the same production mode are executed. That is, the variation pattern of the special PHl-3 has the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of the special PGl-3. Specifically, after the total re-variation display operation is executed twice, the decorative pattern that becomes a non-reach combination is temporarily stopped. Display, and then start a stunning presentation. The variation pattern of special PHI-4 is the same as the variation pattern of special PG1-4. Specifically, after the re-variation display operation is executed three times, a decorative pattern that becomes a non-reach combination is displayed temporarily. Then, the stunning production is started. The variation pattern of the special PHI-5 is the same as the variation pattern of the special PG1-5. Specifically, after the total re-variation display operation is executed once, a decorative pattern that becomes a non-reach combination is temporarily displayed. Then, the stunning production is started. The variation pattern of the special PH3-1 is the same as the variation pattern of the special PG3-1. Specifically, the decorative pattern that becomes one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4 after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the variation display. Is temporarily stopped, and then a stunning effect is started. The variation pattern of the special PH 3-2 has the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of the special PG 3-2. Specifically, after the start of the variation display, the specific representation is not executed and the reach state is reached. A roulette chance effect that is selected from a plurality of types is executed, an ascending effect is selected as an effect that develops, and then an astonishing effect is started. The variation pattern of the special PH 3-3 is the same as the variation pattern of the special PG 3-3. Specifically, the variation state of the special PH 3-3 is reached after a specific effect of “slip” is executed after the start of the variation display, and then developed. A roulette chance effect that selects an effect to be performed from among a plurality of types is executed, an astonishing effect is selected as an effect that develops, and then an astonishing effect is started.

  Further, in the hit variation pattern determination table 137C shown in FIG. 21B, the setting of the change pattern type used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, and FIG. In the setting of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137D shown, the range of the random value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern assigned to the fluctuation pattern in which the visual effect mode performs the same effect operation is the same. That is, in the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137C, the special hit CA4 is selected when the big hit type is determined as “surprise” during the normal state and the total number of reserved storage is “0” to “4”. Corresponding to the variation pattern type of -2, among the variation pattern determination random value MR4, a value in the range of "1" to "45" is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PGl-3, and "46" to "101" The value in the range “” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG1-4, and the value in the range “102” to “251” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG3-1. On the other hand, in the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137D, when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probable change” during the normal state, and the total number of reserved storage is “0” to “4”. Corresponding to the variation pattern type of the selected special CA5-1, a special value in which the value in the range of “1” to “45” of the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination has a variation mode similar to that of the special PG1-3. A value in the range of “46” to “101” is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the special PH1-4 that has the same fluctuation pattern as that of the special PG1-4. Is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG 3-1 having the same variation mode as that of the special PG 3-1.

  In addition, special CA4-3 and special CA5-2 variation pattern types (both variation patterns selected in the normal state when the total number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”), special Fluctuation pattern types of CB4-2 and special CB5-1 (variation pattern types that can be selected when both are in the probabilistic state), special CC4-2 and special CC5-1 (both in the short-time state, the total number of reserved storages is “0”) -Variation pattern type selected when any of "4"), special CC4-3 and special CC5-2 variation pattern types (both in short time state, the total number of pending storage is "5"-"8") The variation pattern type random number MR4 assigned to the variation pattern having the same variation mode is the same for the variation pattern type selected when the variation pattern type is any one of the above. That. Thereby, for example, the player is a big hit because of the difference in the variation mode such as whether the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation in the specific effect of the “pseudo train” is 0, 2 or 3 times. It becomes difficult to predict whether the type is “surprise accuracy” or “fourth probability variation”, and it is possible to make the player feel more surprising than the fact that a sudden appearance fifteen round round hit.

  It should be noted that it may be set so as not to cause the player to predict whether the jackpot type is “surprise” or “fourth probability variation” due to the difference in variation mode. If the ratio determined for each variation pattern is set to be substantially the same, the range of the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern need not be completely the same. As an example, when the jackpot type is determined as “surprise”, it is determined as one variation pattern type regardless of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and used when the jackpot type is “surprise”. The variation patterns (for example, special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PG3-) are the same as the variation mode executed when the big hit type is determined to be the “fourth probability variation” among the variation pattern types. 1) and a variation pattern (for example, special PG 1-1, special PG 1-2, special PG 1-6, special variability) which is different from the variation manner executed when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability variation”. PG2-1, special PG2-2), and the determination rate of each variation pattern that becomes the variation mode similar to the variation mode executed when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability variation” is the big hit type There may be set such that substantially the same as the determined rate of each change pattern of the fluctuation pattern type (e.g., special CA5-1) to be used when it is determined that "fourth probability variation". Specifically, corresponding to the variation pattern type of special CA4-2, a value in the range of “1” to “22” is allocated to the variation pattern of special PG1-1 in the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination. , A value in the range of “23” to “50” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG1-2, a value in the range of “50” to “67” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG1-6, and “68”. A value in the range of “79” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG2-1, a value in the range of “80” to “125” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG2-2, and “126” to “147”. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the special PG1-3, the value of the range of "148" to "175" is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the special PG1-4, and the value of the range of "176" to "251" Is special PG3- It is assumed to be set as assigned to the variation pattern. In the case of such a setting, each variation pattern (for example, special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PG3) having a variation mode similar to the variation mode executed when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability variation”. -1), the ratio determined for special PG1-3 is about 17%, the ratio determined for special PG1-4 is about 22%, and the ratio determined for special PG3-1 is about 60%. . On the other hand, corresponding to the variation pattern type of special CA5-1, a value in the range of “1” to “45” among the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern of special PH1-3. , Values in the range of “46” to “101” are assigned to the variation pattern of the special PH1-4, and values in the range of “102” to “251” are assigned to the variation pattern of the special PH3-1. With such a setting, the ratio determined for the special PH1-3 having the same variation mode as that of the special PG1-3 among the variation patterns when the big hit type is determined to be "fourth probability variation". Is about 18%, the ratio determined for the special PH1-4, which is the same as the fluctuation mode of the special PG1-4, is about 22%, and the special PH3-3 is the same as the fluctuation mode of the special PG3-1. The ratio determined to 1 is about 60%. As described above, the variation pattern type used when the big hit type is “surprise” and the variation pattern type of the special CA 5-1 are the special PG 1-3, the special PG 1-4, and the special PG 3-1, respectively. Although the range of the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern assigned to each of the special PH1-3, the special PH1-4, and the special PH3-1 is different, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is allocated. The ratio is almost the same. Even in this case, it becomes difficult for the player to predict whether the jackpot type is “surprise” or “fourth likelihood” due to the difference in the variation mode, and therefore, the player is in a stunning fifteen round jackpot state. This can make you feel more surprising.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes loss variation patterns 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. When it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”, the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B indicate the variation pattern according to whether or not to reach the reach state, the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each loss variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, in the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table, and the variation pattern type is determined to be one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as a usage table according to the result. The loss variation pattern determination table 138A corresponds to the random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, when the decorative pattern variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Data for determination to be assigned to any one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type when the decorative pattern variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. It consists of data for determination assigned to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  Here, in the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 23, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponding to the case of non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2. A random number value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for executing a specific effect such as reach PA1-7. Also, corresponding to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CB1-2, a specific effect in which the value in the range of “1” to “100” among the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is “end of development chance eyes” is executed. Assigned to the non-reach PA1-7 fluctuation pattern. With such a setting, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponds to the determination that the decorative symbol variable display result is “losing” and the determination that the decorative symbol variable display state is not the reach state. It is possible to determine that one of the variation patterns of the reach PA1-7 and perform an effect operation as a specific effect.

  For the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4, non-reach HA1- of the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination in the variation pattern type determination table 136A for non-reach shown in FIG. A value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned corresponding to 1, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned to correspond to the non-reach HA 1-2. A value in the range of “231” to “241” is assigned corresponding to HA1-3, and a range of “237” to “241” corresponding to each of non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5. Value is assigned. Here, with respect to the determination result of non-reach HA1-1, in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 17A, the reach determination disturbance corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. A value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned to the numerical value MR2-2. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “1” and “1” to “217” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and “1” to “220” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, “1” in the reach determination random number MR2-2 corresponding to the total reserved storage numbers “3” and “4”. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-5, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “5” to “8” and “1” of the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is larger than that when the total number of reserved memories is “0”. Lower. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “4” or “5” to “8”, the total number of reserved memories is “0”, or “1” or “2”. Compared with the case of "", the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is low.

  In the example of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 10, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. 3.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach PA1 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of −5 is 16.70 seconds, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 in which the specific effect of “Intro” is executed is 10.20 seconds, The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 in which the specific effect “end of development opportunity end” is executed is 9.25 seconds. That is, the special figure change time in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the special figure change time in the change pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than that when it is less than “3”. Thus, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 24, the variation for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA2-2, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-4 and the reach effect such as super PA3-5 to super PA3-8. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA2-3 or super CB2-1, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is included in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as super PB3-1 to super PB3-5. Assigned.

  In addition, a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, such as a variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-5, Super PA 3-9, Super PA 3-10, Super PB 3-4, Super PB 3-5. As for the variation pattern, the variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state after the pseudo continuous variation. That is, since the variation patterns of super PA 3-4 and super PA 3-5 are variation patterns for executing reach effect α1, the variation pattern type of super CA 2-2 in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Corresponding to this case, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of Super PA 3-9 and Super PA 3-10 is a variation pattern for executing reach effect α2, it corresponds to the case of the variation pattern type of Super CA2-2 in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation patterns of the super PB 3-4 and the super PB 3-5 are variation patterns for executing the reach effect β1, the variation pattern types of the super CA 2-3 and the super CB 2-1 are used in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B. Corresponding to the case, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned.

  For the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1 and super CA2-2, the variation pattern type determination is performed in any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. A random value MR3 is assigned. Also, the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135C shown in FIGS. 18A and 18C. ing. A random pattern MR3 for determining a variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CB 2-1 in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. As described above, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 18A to 18C, the effect in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the decorative display variable display state becomes the reach state. Table data (determination data) is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of operation. Further, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, after the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified by type.

  As described above, the determination of the variation pattern is performed in two stages, such as being performed after determining the variation pattern type, and the determination of reach production is included in the variation pattern type of the first step. Even when various effects other than effects are performed, when changing the appearance rate of a specific reach effect at the development stage, it is only necessary to change the distribution of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and it is easy to develop. Become.

  Further, in the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137A shown in FIG. 20, the variation pattern determination random number MR4 corresponding to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-2 has a range of “1” to “3”. The value is assigned to the variation pattern of Super PA4-1 that does not execute the specific effect. Among the random numbers MR4 for determining the variation pattern, values in the range of “4” to “11” are assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-2 that executes the specific effect of “slip”. The value in the range of “21” is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3 that executes the specific effect of “intro”. Among the random values MR4 for determining the variation pattern, the value in the range of “22” to “34” is the variation pattern of the super PA 4-4 that executes the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in which the all-revariable display operation is performed twice. The value in the range of “35” to “52” is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-5 that executes the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which the all-revariable display operation is performed three times. . On the other hand, in the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 24, “1” to “66” among the random values MR4 for variation pattern determination corresponding to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-2. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-1, which does not execute the specific effect. Of the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, values in the range of “67” to “120” are assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 3-2 that executes the specific effect of “slip”. The value in the range of “161” is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 3-3 that executes the specific effect of “intro”. Among the random values MR4 for determining the variation pattern, the value in the range of “162” to “193” is the variation pattern of the super PA 3-4 that executes the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in which the all-revariation display operation is performed twice. And a value in the range of “194” to “203” is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 3-5 that executes the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in which the all-revariable display operation is performed three times. .

  As described above, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 4-1 that does not execute the specific effect is the super PA 4-2 to the super PA 4-5 that executes the specific effect. The ratio is determined to be lower than any of the fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “losing”, the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-1 that does not execute the specific effect is the super PA 3-2 to the super PA 3-3 that executes the specific effect. It is higher than the ratio determined by any one of the five fluctuation patterns. With this setting, when the reach effect α1 is executed, the reliability when the specific effect is executed is more reliable than the case where the specific effect is not executed (the possibility that the variable display result is “big hit”). Can be high.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3 that executes the specific effect of “intro” is the super PA 4− that executes the specific effect of “slip”. It is higher than the ratio determined by the fluctuation pattern of 2. The ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 4-4 that executes the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” that performs the all-revariable display operation twice is the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3 that executes the specific effect of the “intro”. It is higher than the determined rate. The ratio determined by the variation pattern of the Super PA 4-5 that executes the specific reproduction of the “pseudo-run” that performs the total re-variation display operation three times is the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” that performs the total re-variation display operation twice. It is higher than the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 4-4 to be executed. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “losing”, the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-3 that executes “intro” is the super PA 3- that executes the specific effect of “slip”. It is lower than the ratio determined by the fluctuation pattern of 2. The ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-4 that executes the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” that performs the all-revariable display operation twice is determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-3 that executes the “intro”. It is lower than the rate. The ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-5 that executes the specific effect of “pseudo-run” that performs the total re-variable display operation three times is the ratio that is determined for the specific effect of “pseudo-run” that performs the total re-change display operation twice It is lower than the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-4 to be executed. With this setting, the reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”) is greater when the “Intro” specific effect is executed than when the “Slip” specific effect is executed. In addition, the reliability can be increased when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed rather than when the “intro” specific effect is executed.

  Furthermore, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the total re-variable display operation is performed twice. While the ratio determined by the fluctuation pattern of the Super PA 4-5 that executes the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” that performs the re-variable display operation three times is higher, the variable display result is “lost” In this case, the “pseudo-continuous display operation” is performed three times more than the ratio determined in the variation pattern of the super PA 3-4 that executes the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” performing the total re-variable display operation twice. The ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-5 that executes the specific effect “is lower. With such a setting, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, it is more reliable when the total re-variable display operation is performed three times than when the total re-variable display operation is performed twice. The degree (possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit”) can be increased.

  In correspondence with the type of reach effect, the random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect, the type of the specific effect, and the number of executions of the total variation display operation in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. By setting different values, the reliability of execution of a specific reach effect differs depending on whether or not the specific effect is executed, the type of the specific effect, and the number of executions of the total variation display operation in the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous”. It may be allowed.

  In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 5, game control as shown in FIG. A data holding area 150 is provided. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 25 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a start data storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control. A timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition by winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning in the first start winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type are set as the pending data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). Remember.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. Hold data of a game (a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the winning in association with the holding number in the winning order to the second starting winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type are set as the pending data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). Remember.

  The start data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which game ball has won in either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, so that the winning order of each game ball can be specified. As an example, the start data storage unit 151C stores “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening or “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second starting winning opening. The game balls are stored in association with the hold numbers according to the winning order of each game ball.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a short time flag, a big hit start flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In the step S15 of FIG. 46 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 47, it is instructed which process should be selected and executed. The ordinary symbol process flag indicates which process in the ordinary symbol process shown in step S16 of FIG. 46 or the ordinary symbol process shown in FIG. 57 executed for controlling the progress of the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol indicator 20. Indicates whether to select and execute.

  The big hit flag is set to an on state corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The small hit flag is set to an on state corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the time reduction state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the completion of the time reduction state. .

  The big hit start flag is set to the on state in response to the display result in the special display game or the variable display of the decorative symbol being “big hit”. On the other hand, the big hit start flag is cleared and turned off in response to the big winning opening being opened in the first round in the big hit gaming state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. It is used as a down counter that counts down automatically. Alternatively, the game control process timer is used as an up-counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time point, such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state start point, and periodically counts up. May be.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a special figure variation time which is the execution time of the special figure game. As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The normal map change timer is for measuring the time for controlling the progress of the normal game, such as the normal map change time, which is the execution time of the normal game, on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a random counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a total reserved memory number counter, a round number counter, a winning number counter, and the like. .

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 counts a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104, so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. belongs to. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4 is stored as a random count value. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated. The round number counter may also count the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the small hit gaming state. The winning number counter is for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening. For example, data indicating a count initial value “0” is set in the winning number counter as the winning number count value every time the round starts. Each time a game ball enters the big winning opening, the winning number count value is incremented by one and updated.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a variable special figure designation buffer, a jackpot type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) is “1” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Set to Further, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0” in response to the completion of the special figure game.

  In the jackpot type buffer, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, and “surprise probability”. The buffer value corresponding to the determination result of which to be determined is stored. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 13, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the value of the jackpot type buffer (hit type buffer value) is set to “00” and the jackpot type When the type is “first probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “01”, and when the big hit type is “second probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “02” and the big hit type is In the case of “third probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “03”, and in the case of the big hit type “fourth probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is “04” to “ When the big hit type is “surprise”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “07”.

  An I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 5 is an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes a program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal to the sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14. In contrast, wiring for transmitting an electrical signal as an information signal, wiring for transmitting a driving signal as an information signal to the movable display device 50, and transmission of a video signal (electrical signal) to the display screen 51 Wiring, etc. to connect are connected. Furthermore, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal from the operation button 30 is also connected to the effect control board 12.

  FIG. 6 is a rear view of the movable display device 50. The display member 52 including the display unit 51 of the movable display device 50 is movable up and down. Therefore, the wiring 96 connected from the effect control board 12 to the display screen 51 also operates. As a result, the wiring may be entangled with other parts or the wiring may be cut. In order to prevent this, a fixing member 95 is provided on the base 90, and the wiring 96 from the effect control board 12 to the fixing member 95 is fixed. Then, it is connected to a connector 56 provided on the display member 52 through a fixing member 96. The wiring 96 from the fixing member 95 to the connector 56 is connected with play to such an extent that it does not become tensioned even if the display member 52 operates. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 6, the wiring 96 that operates when the display member 52 moves up and down is restrained from the fixing member 95 to the connector 56. The possibility that 96 will be cut can be minimized.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 26, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, temporary stop symbol determination for promotion effect Random number value SR2, random number value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding / development chance, random number values SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, for determining the promotion effect execution Random number SR5, random numbers SR6-1 and SR6-3 for determining the first and third specific effect patterns, random value SR7 for determining the notice pattern type, and random values SR8- for determining the first to third notice patterns. Numerical data indicating each of 1 to SR8-3 is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 124 includes all of these random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5, SR6-1, SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3. Or what is necessary is just to count numerical data which shows a part. The effect control CPU 120 uses various random counters different from the random number circuit 124 such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of numerical values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5, SR6-1, SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3 are counted. You may do it. Further, when the random number circuit 124 is not mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 uses the random counter to select random values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-. 3, numerical data indicating all of SR5, SR6-1, SR6-3, SR7, SR8-1 to SR8-3 may be counted.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left” and “middle” in the display area of the image display device 5 as fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of decorative symbols. , A random number value used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the final stop symbol here is finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbol variable display ends. These are the three decorative designs. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the promotion effect is temporarily stopped at the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for "left", "middle", and "right" when executing the promotion effect during change. It is a random value used to determine the decorative pattern of the normal jackpot combination to be displayed, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding / development chance is “left”, “middle”, This is a random value used to determine the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all or part of the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Values in the range of “1” to “101” are used. Take.

  The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random value used to determine a combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. As an example, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, the random effect value SR5 for promotion effect execution determination Or a random number value used for determining whether or not to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  Random values SR6-1 and SR6-3 for determining the first and third specific effect patterns include a plurality of specific effect patterns corresponding to the contents of the effect operation when executing the specific effects such as “slip” and “intro”. A random value used to determine one of the types. As an example, the random value SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “slip” specific effect, and is in the range of “1” to “71”. Takes a value. The random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is used to determine a specific effect pattern in the case of executing the specific effect of “Intro”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. .

  The random value SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is used to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect, and to determine any one of a plurality of kinds of prepared notice pattern types when the notice effect is executed. It is a random value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”. The random numbers SR8-1 to SR8-3 for determining the first to third notice patterns are random values used to determine any one of a plurality of kinds of prepared notice patterns. As an example, the random value SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of the “movable display device”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “499”. The random value SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of the “step-up image”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “1009”. The random value SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is used to determine the notice pattern in the notice effect of “mail display”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 5 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, a final stop shown in FIGS. 27A to 27D is used as a table for determining a predetermined decorative pattern to be one of the predetermined non-reach combinations and the development chances HC1 to HC8. Symbol determination tables 160A to 160D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 27A is a final left symbol that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the predetermined decorative symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A includes determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is composed of The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 27 (B) is a final right symbol that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R among the predetermined decorative symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 or the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B stores the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It consists of data for determination assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of decorative symbols to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 27C is a final final symbol that is a fixed ornament symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” ornament symbol display area 5C among the fixed ornament symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. This table is referred to for determining the stop symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like. .

  Here, the determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 28. From the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, It is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C has a third random number SR1- 3 is made up of data for determination and the like assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of decorative symbols that become the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 27 (B), the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. Is not assigned the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol combination is a reach combination or a jackpot combination (except for the odd chance TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. In addition, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 27C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined decorative symbols. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion that becomes the combination of. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the part that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 7A, the part that becomes the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is set in the portion that becomes the random chances TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 7C, and further in the portion that becomes a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Not assigned. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, an expansion chance item HC1 to HC8, or a random chance symbol TC1. ˜TC4, and even certain non-reach combinations similar to these chances.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 27 (D) shows the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C when the specific effect “end of development opportunity” is executed. 5R, the final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6, which are the final decorative symbols, are determined based on the random numbers SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbols. It is a table that is referred to to determine either. The final stop symbol determination table 160D is composed of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the development chance items HC1 to HC8.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, as tables for determining a confirmed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 30A is a left final stop symbol FZ2 that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the finalized decorative symbols that are reach-losing combinations. -1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referenced to determine. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a decorative symbol (left and right final stop symbol FZ2) in which the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. −1, FZ2-2), the data for determination assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 30B is a final final stop symbol FZ2 that is a finalized symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C among the finalized symbols that are reach-losing combinations. -3 is a table that is referred to to determine -3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol.

  Here, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference that is a difference value between the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols that are the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The That is, in the variable display of decorative symbols, the variation of decorative symbols is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and “left” → “right” → “ When the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, such as “medium”, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed last. The left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, and then the final stop symbol determination table 162B is The difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a final decorative symbol that is the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. The super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-5, the super PB 3-1 to the super PB 3-6, and the super PC 3-1 to the super PC 3-4. The random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is changed to the symbol differences “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, and “+2” depending on the case where the variation pattern is any of −10. It consists of decision data to be assigned.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, final stop symbol determination tables shown in FIGS. 31 (A) to (D) as tables for determining a final decorative symbol to be one of the big hit combinations and the chances of success TC1 to TC4. 163A to 163D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 31 (A) stops at the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as fixed ornament symbols that are usually a big hit combination. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the symbol number “of the normal symbol that is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3. It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 31 (B) stops at the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as the confirmed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3, and the symbol number “ It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. The final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 31 (C) shows the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”. Of the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4-3 are determined based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. It is a table that is referred to to determine either. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is made up of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the odd chance items TC1 to TC4. The final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. 31 (D) shows the left in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” when the big hit type is “probable”. The combination of the fixed decorative symbols that become the middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4-3 is selected from the random chance values TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine. The final stop symbol determination table 163D is composed of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the probability chance items TC1 to TC4.

  Here, in the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 31 (C), among the random number values SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol for the probability chance TC1, “1” to “30”. A value in the range is assigned, and a value in the range of “31” to “55” is assigned to the chance of chance TC2. Also, a value in the range of “56” to “70” is assigned to the random chance value TC1 in the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol for the random chance value TC3. Is assigned a value in the range of “71” to “80”. On the other hand, in the final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. 31D, among the random number values SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol, “1” to “10” with respect to the odd chance TC1. A value in the range of “11” to “25” is assigned to the chance of chance TC2. Also, a value in the range of “26” to “50” is assigned to the random chance value TC1 in the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. Is assigned a value in the range of “51” to “80”. Therefore, when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, as compared with the case where the big hit type is “surprise accuracy”, any one of the random chance items TC1 and TC2 is used as a combination of the final decorative symbols as the final stop symbols. The ratio at which either of the chance chance items TC3 and TC4 is determined is low. As a result, as a final stop symbol, depending on which of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed, it is suggested to the player whether the jackpot type is “fourth probability change” or “accuracy”. Can do.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, specific effect pattern determination tables 164A and 164C shown in FIGS. 32A and 32B as tables for determining one of a plurality of types of specific effect patterns. Yes. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 32 (A) indicates that the specific effect pattern slips TP1 based on the first specific effect pattern determination random value SR6-1 when the “slip” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to slip TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-7, super PA4-2, super PA4-7, Super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Super PF1-3, Special According to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 10 and 11) in which a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as a variation pattern of PG1-2, special PG2-2, special PG3-3, and special PH3-3. The random value SR6-1 for determining the specific effect pattern is assigned to the specific effect patterns of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4. And the like have been constructed from Teru decision for the data.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, By temporarily stopping the decorative symbols in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and then rapidly changing the decorative symbols in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, In the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, “left” and “right” After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbol display area 5L of the “left” is re-fluctuated at high speed and then stopped and displayed. In the decorative symbol display area 5L, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, “left” and “right” The decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and then the decorative symbols are redisplayed in the decorative pattern display area 5R. In the decorative symbol display area 5R, the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, “left” and “right” The decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and then the decorative symbol display area 5L of the “left” is redisplayed at a low speed and then stopped to display “left”. In the decorative symbol display area 5L, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 32B indicates the specific effect pattern intro TP3 based on the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern when the “intro” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to intro TP3-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164C includes non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-8, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-8, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super In response to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 10 and 11) in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, such as a variation pattern of PB5-3, the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is converted into intro TP3. -1 to intro TP3-3 are made up of determination data to be assigned to specific production patterns.

  Here, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, for example, whether the previous effect buffer value provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 164 shown in FIG. 45 is “1” to “3”. Accordingly, the assignment of the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern to the specific effect patterns of the intro TP3-1 to the intro TP3-3 corresponding to a plurality of types of effect operations is different. The previous effect buffer value is set to “1” when the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined to be intro TP3-1, and is set to “2” when it is determined as intro TP3-2. When it is determined to be intro TP3-3, it is set to “3”. When the previous effect buffer value is “1”, the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-1, and the previous effect buffer value is “2”. In some cases, the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-2, and when the previous effect buffer value is "3", 3 The random value SR6-3 for determining the specific effect pattern is not assigned. When the specific effect of “intro” is executed according to the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6 by such assignment, the specific effect same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “intro” executed last time It can be prevented from becoming a pattern.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a fluctuating promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 33A and a jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 33B. In the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 33A, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). Is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect based on the promotion effect execution determination random value SR5. The changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A changes the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”. It consists of decision data assigned to the determination result indicating the presence or absence of the promotion effect. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal” or “third probability variation”, a part of the randomized value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result of the promotion effect during the change, and the rest is changing. It is assigned to the determination result without promotion effect. In this case, if the determination result indicates that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion failure effect is executed. When the jackpot type is “first probability change”, a part of the random effect value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result with the changing promotion effect, and the rest is determined without the changing promotion effect. Assigned to the result. In this case, if the determination result indicates that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion success effect is executed. Further, when the big hit type is “second probability variation” or “fourth probability variation”, the random value SR5 for promotion effect execution determination is all assigned to the determination result of no variation promotion effect, and the promotion during variation Neither the successful production nor the fluctuating promotion production will be executed.

  In the big hit middle promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 33B, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). In this case, the table is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect based on the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution. The jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B determines whether the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, and determines the promotion effect execution determination random number SR5 as a jackpot. It is composed of data for determination assigned to a determination result indicating the presence or absence of a promotion promotion effect or a jackpot promotion failure effect. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result of the jackpot promotion promotion effect, and the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. It will be. When the jackpot type is “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “fourth probability variation”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result without the promotion effect during the jackpot. In other words, neither the jackpot promotion promotion effect or the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. Further, when the jackpot type is “third probability variation”, a part of the random effect value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result of the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, and the rest has the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect. Is assigned to the judgment result. In this case, depending on the determination result, either the jackpot promotion promotion success effect or the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, temporary stop symbols shown in FIGS. 34 (A) to 34 (D) are used as tables for determining decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped when a specific effect of “slip” is executed. Decision tables 166A to 166D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D has a temporary slip / development opportunity temporary change according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the decorative symbol display area for changing the decorative symbols again. The random number value SR3 for determining the stop symbol is composed of determination data assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that are temporary stop symbols. That is, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is a decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in accordance with the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. In response to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the slip / development chance temporary stop symbol is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “1” of the decorative symbols to be the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1. Data for determination to be assigned to "8". The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is a symbol of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2. Contains decision data to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C has a decorative symbol pattern that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3. Contains decision data to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is a symbol of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in accordance with the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 Contains decision data to be assigned to.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, temporary tables shown in FIGS. 35A to 35F are used as tables for determining decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167F are included. Each of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167F indicates that the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-5, super PA3- 9, Super PA3-10, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-5, Super PA4-9, Super PA4-10, Super PA5-4, Super PA5-5, Super PB3-4, Super PB3-5, Super PB4- 4. Super PB4-5, Super PB5-4, Super PB5-5, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-3-Special PG1-5, Special PH1-3-Special PH1-5 Depending on the remaining number of re-variable display operations that are performed until the final decorative symbol that is the stop symbol is stopped and displayed, etc. It is selected as Le. Here, for example, the remaining number of re-variation display operations is “0” in the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo continuous variation) in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Becomes “1” when the decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state (pseudo continuous variation), and becomes “2” when the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed twice before (“pseudo continuous variation”). By the time the pseudo continuous variation in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and executed is executed, the variation of the decorative symbol in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed (pseudo continuous variation) is “3”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo continuous fluctuation (the fluctuation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shows the total re-variation display operation executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the temporary temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the temporary symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as a right symbol to be stopped and selected as a use table for determining a middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as a middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C Is done. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-5, Super PA 3-9, Super PA 3-10, Super PA 4-4, Super PA 4-5, Super PA 4-9, Super PA 4-10. , Super PA5-4, Super PA5-5, Super PB3-4, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-4, Super PB4-5, Super PB5-4, Super PB5-5, Super PF1-1 Accordingly, when the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stopped symbol is stopped and displayed is “1”, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed. The temporary stop display is performed in the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, in the decorative symbol display area 5R on the “right”. Right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as a symbol, is selected as the usage table for determining a temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 While the design in which the temporary stop displayed on decorative pattern display area 5C of "medium".

  In the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C, when the variation pattern is special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PH1-3, or special PH1-4, the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. If the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until “1” is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, “ The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol for temporary stop display in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2, which is the middle symbol for temporary stop display in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. -3 is selected as a use table for determining -3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D performs the entire re-execution executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being either special PG1-5 or special PH1-5. When the remaining number of times of the variable display operation is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which becomes the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “right” decorative symbol display area The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped at 5R, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, are determined. Selected as a usage table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167E has a variation pattern of super PA3-4, super PA3-5, super PA3-9, super PA3-10, super PA4-4, super PA4-5, super PA4-9, super PA4. -10, Super PA5-4, Super PA5-5, Super PB3-4, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-4, Super PB4-5, Super PB5-4, Super PB5-5, Super PF1-1, Special PG1 -3, special PG1-4, special PH1-3, special PH1-4, the total re-variable display operation executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed When the remaining number of times is “2”, the left temporary that becomes the left symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L Stop symbol KZ3-1, right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2 as a right symbol for temporary stop display in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, middle symbol for temporary stop display in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C Is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167F has a variation pattern of super PA3-5, super PA3-10, super PA4-5, super PA4-10, super PA5-5, super PB3-5, super PB4-5, super PB5-5. , The rest of the all-revariable display operation executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of Super PF1-1, Special PG1-4, or Special PH1-4 When the number of times is “3”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the temporary stop in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R The right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, which is the right symbol to be displayed, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ4-3, which is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, are determined. It is selected as the usage table for. If the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, special PG1-5, or special PH1-5, the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation for re-variation after temporarily displaying the decorative symbols is performed only once. Therefore, it is not necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167E or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167F as the use table. The fluctuation pattern is Super PA3-4, Super PA3-9, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-9, Super PA5-4, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Special PG1-3, Special PH1 In the case of −3, since the number of executions of the total re-variation display operation for re-variation after displaying the decorative symbol temporarily is displayed is 2, it is necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167F as the use table. Absent.

  The temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D shown in FIGS. 35A to 35D are respectively the symbol numbers “1” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. ”To“ 8 ”, the random value SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is configured by a combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. It consists of data for determination to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167E shown in FIG. 35E includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 and a right temporary stop symbol determined using either the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. Depending on whether the combination of KZ2-2 and medium temporary stop symbol 2-3 is the pseudo-continuous chance GC1-GC8, the second pseudo-random temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2 is It consists of data for determination assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 constituted by a combination of the right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2 and KZ3-3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 35F includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, a right temporary stop symbol 3-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167E. The random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is assigned to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ4-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  By determining temporary stop symbols using such temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167F, for example, as shown in FIG. 36, pseudo continuous fluctuations such as non-reach PA1-5, special PG1-5, and special PH1-5. Is the variation pattern of one execution or super PA3-4, super PA3-9, super PA4-4, super PA4-9, super PA5-4, super PB3-4, super PB4-4, super PB5 -4, special PG1-3, special PH1-3, etc., whether the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern of two times, super PA3-5, super PA3-10, super PA4-5, super PA4-10, super PA5-5, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-5, Super PB5-5, Super PF1-1, Special PG1 4. Depending on whether the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation such as special PH1-4 is a variation pattern of 3 times, “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, The decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of 5R can be determined as any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  Also, super PA4-4, super PA4-5, super PA4-9, super PA4-10, super PA5-4, super PA5-5, super PB4-4, super PB4-5, super PB5-4, super PB5- 5. Referenced when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “third probability variation”, such as 5, Super PF1-1 Refers to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, special PG1-3 to special PG1-5, special PH1-3 to special PH1-5, etc., when the big hit type is "4th probability change" or "surprise accuracy" In the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167C and 167D, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination assigned to each of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is performed. Range of the random number value SR4-1 are different. As a result, the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “third probability variation”, or the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” or “surprise probability”. It is possible to determine which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is made at a different ratio depending on whether or not there is. Furthermore, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C that is referred to when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” and the total reserved memory number is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”), and the total reserved memory number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. Even in the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D referred to in a certain case, the range of the random value SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol assigned to each of the pseudo consecutive chance points GC1 to GC8 is different. Yes. As a result, it is possible to determine which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is made at a different ratio depending on whether the total number of reserved memories is less than the predetermined number or the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. .

  In addition, in the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167C and 167D, as compared with the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol assigned to the pseudo-continuous chance GC2 is determined. The range is set wide. With such a setting, when the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the case of “fourth probability variation” and “surprise probability” is the pseudo consecutive chance Since it is easy to be determined as GC2, the player is informed that the big hit type has been determined as either “4th probability variation” or “surprise accuracy” by displaying the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chance item GC2 temporarily. Can be suggested.

  In addition, the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167E and 167F are set so as to be easily determined at the same pseudo continuous chance as the pseudo continuous chance determined by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167B to 167D. Therefore, when the big hit type is determined to be either “fourth probability variation” or “surprising probability”, the pseudo consecutive chance GC2 is configured not only in the last pseudo continuous variation but also in the pseudo continuous variation before that. The decorative pattern to be displayed is easily displayed as a temporary stop.

  Further, when the variation pattern is special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PH1-3, or special PH1-4, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is referred to by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. If the variation pattern is special PG1-5 or special PH1-5, it is determined as one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D. When the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” or “surprise probability”, it is determined to be one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 at the same rate. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability change” or “surprise” from the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chances displayed temporarily stopped. .

  Note that the temporary stop symbol determination table that is referred to when the remaining number of all re-variable display operations is “2” or “3” is super PA3-4, super PA3-5, super PA3-9. , Super PA3-10, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-5, Super PA4-9, Super PA4-10, Super PA5-4, Super PA5-5, Super PB3-4, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-4 , Super PB4-5, Super PB5-4, Super PB5-5, Super PF1-1 The variation determined when the jackpot type is any one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” Either the pattern or the special hit type such as special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PH1-3, special PH1-4 is "4th probability change" or "surprise" In it, depending whether the variation pattern determined when, may be provided respectively by the plurality. Then, the range of the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol assigned to each of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8, or the randomness for determining the third pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol. By setting the range of the numerical value SR4-3 to be different, when a decorative pattern constituting a different pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation and the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation, The player may be informed that the jackpot type has been determined as either “fourth probability change” or “surprise”. Alternatively, when the decorative symbols constituting the same pseudo-continuous chance are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first pseudo-continuous variation and the second pseudo-continuous variation, the big hit type is “4th probability variation”, “ May be suggested to the player.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 37 is used as a table for determining a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when a specific effect of “Development Chance” is executed. include. The temporary stop symbol determination table 168 has a chance of slipping / development according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols which become the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. The random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for time is composed of determination data assigned to the development chance items HC1 to HC8 constituted by the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3. ing.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 38 as a table for determining a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed when the changing promotion effect is executed. . The temporary stop symbol determination table 169 has the same left center right that is stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as the final symbol combination that is a big hit combination In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3, It consists of decision data assigned to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as the stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. The notice pattern type determination table 170 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of kinds of notice pattern types based on the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type. The notice pattern type determination table 170 indicates that the variation pattern is any one of non-reach PA1-1, non-reach PA1-2, non-reach PA1-4, non-reach PB1-1, and non-reach PC1-1. ”Is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, or non-reach PA1-3, PB1-2, PC1-2, special PG1-1, special PG1-2, special PG1-6, special PG2-1 , Special PG2-2, Special PG3-1 to Special PG3-3, Special PH3-1 to Special PH3-3, which is one of the variation patterns in which a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed In this case, depending on the variation pattern other than these variation patterns, the random number SR7 for determining the notification pattern type is set to the notification pattern of the notification CY1 to the notification CY3 without the notification or the notification CY1 to the notification CY3. Etc. and a determination data to be assigned to down type.

  Here, in the notice pattern type determination table 170, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-8, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-8, super PA5-3, Corresponding to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 10 and 11) in which a specific effect of “Intro” is executed, such as Super PB 4-3 and Super PB 5-3, a random value SR7 for determining a notice pattern type is set. All are assigned without notice. Therefore, when the specific effect of “intro” is executed, execution of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is limited. Here, in the specific effect of “Intro”, the variation of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then within a short time. When the effect display in the specific effect is started and the notice effect is performed, the execution period overlaps. Therefore, the notice pattern type determination table 170 assigns a random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type so that there is always no notice in the case of a variation pattern in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed. The notice effect in which the specific effect of "" and the execution period overlap each other can be prevented from being executed.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, notification pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIGS. 40 to 42 as tables for determining any of a plurality of types of notification patterns. The notice pattern determination table 171A shown in FIG. 40 indicates that when the notice pattern type is decided to be notice CY1, there is no notice or the notice pattern is designated as notice YP1- based on the random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern. 1 to 1 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the notices YP1-4. The notice pattern determination table 171A determines the random number value SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern according to the variation pattern without decision or assigning to the notice patterns of the notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4, etc. It is composed of

  Here, in the notice patterns of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4, the effect display in the notice effect of the “movable display device” is performed in different effect display modes. In the notice effect of “movable display device”, the movable display unit 50 is operated in a manner corresponding to each notice pattern of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4, and a notice image is displayed on the display screen 51.

  The notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 41 indicates that when the notice pattern type is decided to be notice CY2, there is no notice or the notice pattern is designated as notice YP2- based on the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern. 1 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the notices YP2-4. The notice pattern determination table 171B determines the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern according to the variation pattern, without decision, or data for decision assigned to the notice patterns of the notice YP2-1 to the notice YP2-4. It is composed of

  Here, in the notice patterns of the notice YP2-1 to the notice YP2-4, the effect display in the notice effect of the “step-up image” is performed in different effect display modes. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and then each notice pattern of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4 is displayed. Correspondingly, a plurality of types of effect images may be switched and displayed according to a predetermined order, or the effect images may not be switched.

  As an example, in the notice pattern of notice YP2-1, after the effect image of the first step among the plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, the effect image is switched. I will not. In the notice pattern of notice YP2-2, the effect image is not switched after the effect image of the second step among the plural types of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In the notice pattern of notice YP2-3, after the effect image of the first step among a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, the effect image is switched once. To display the effect image of the second step. In the notice pattern of notice YP2-4, after the effect image of the first step among the plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, the effect image is switched twice. After the effect image of the second step is made, the effect image of the third step is made. Therefore, in this embodiment, by determining the notice pattern to any one of the notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4 using the notice pattern determination table 171B, the number of effect images to be switched and the type of effect image to be displayed Can be determined.

  The notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 42 indicates that when the notice pattern type is decided to be notice CY3, no notice is given or the notice pattern is designated as notice YP3- based on the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern. 1 is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the notices YP3-3. The notice pattern determination table 171C determines the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern according to the variation pattern, without the notice, or the decision data assigned to the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 to the notice YP3-3, etc. It is composed of

  Here, in the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 to the notice YP3-3, the effect display in the notice effect of “mail display” is performed in different effect display modes. In the “mail display” notice effect, an effect image that prompts the user to operate the operation button 30 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and then the notice YP 3-1 to the notice is issued in response to the operation button 30 being operated. While displaying the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern of YP3-3, if the operation button 30 is not operated, the effect image corresponding to each notice pattern is not displayed. As described above, in the “mail display” notice effect, the effect operation changes in response to the operation button 30 being operated.

  In the notice pattern determination table 171A shown in FIG. 40, the notice pattern determination ratio is varied depending on the variable display result and the number of times of pseudo-series re-variation (pseudo-series fluctuation). It is possible to vary the ratio (reliability) that becomes a big hit when the notice effect of each notice pattern is executed, the ratio (reliability) that becomes reach, and the like. For example, the notice pattern of notice YP1-4 is determined only when the number of times of pseudo-variable re-variation (pseudo-continuous fluctuation) is three. Then, when the variable display result is “big hit” (other than suddenness), the random number value SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern is assigned so that it can be determined more easily than when “reach is lost”. In this way, it is possible to vary the ratio of executing the notice effect depending on which of the variable display results. In this way, when the variable display result is “big hit” (other than the suddenness), it is easier to determine than when it is “reach out of reach”, so that the notice effect of the notice YP1-4 is executed. The ratio (reliability) that becomes a big hit can be increased.

  In the notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 41, the random value SR8 for determining the second notice pattern corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of the non-reach PA1-1 to PA1-5, PA1-7, PB1-1, and PC1-1. -2 is assigned a value in the range of “1” to “859” without notice. On the other hand, in response to the variation patterns of special PG1-1, special PG1-2, special PG1-6, special PG3-1 to special PG3-3, special PH3-1 to special PH3-3, the second notice Among the random numbers SR8-2 for pattern determination, values in the range of “1” to “759” are assigned without notice. Corresponding to the variation patterns of special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PH1-3, and special PH1-4, the range of “1” to “659” in the random value SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern The value of is assigned without notice. Corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of special PG 1-5 and special PH 1-5, values in the range of “1” to “559” of the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern are assigned without notice. . Also, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1, super PA3-2, super PA3-4, super PA3-5, super PA3-9, super PA3-10, super PB3-1, super PB3- 2, “1” to “209” among the random numbers SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of the super PB 3-4, the super PB 3-5, the super PC 3-1 to the super PC 3-4 Values in the range are assigned without notice. In addition, a value in the range of “510” to “1009” among the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern is assigned to the notice YP2-2. On the other hand, corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of special PG2-1 and special PG2-2, values in the range of “1” to “109” in the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern are not notified. Assigned to. In addition, a value in the range of “610” to “1009” among the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern is assigned to the notice YP2-2. With this setting, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the big hit type is “surprise”, and the variable display result is “small hit”. Thus, the ratio of executing the notice effect can be made the same. In particular, special PG1-3, special PG1-4 and special PH1-3, special PH1-4, special PG1-5 and special PH1-5, and special PG3-1 to special PG3-3. And the special PH3-1 to the special PH3-3 are the same. It makes me feel more surprising than what I did. In addition, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” or “surprise probability”, or when the variable display result is a variation pattern corresponding to “small hit”, variable display When the result is “losing”, or when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” and “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the variation pattern corresponds to The ratio of executing the notice effect, the ratio of executing the notice YP2-2, and the like can be varied. Furthermore, when there is a variation pattern such as special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PH1-3, special PH1-4 corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is any of “0” to “4”, The ratio of executing the notice effect may be different depending on the variation pattern such as special PG 1-5 and special PH 1-5 corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”. it can.

  Furthermore, in the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 42, the random number value SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of the non-reach PA1-1 to PA1-3, PB1-1, and PC1-1. Among these, values in the range of “1” to “190” are assigned without notice. On the other hand, in response to the variation patterns of special PG 1-1, special PG 1-2, special PG 1-6, special PG 3-1 to special PG 3-3, special PH 3-1 to special PH 3-3, the third notice Among the random numbers SR8-3 for pattern determination, values in the range of “1” to “90” are assigned without notice. Corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, non-reach PA1-5, and non-reach PA1-7, values in the range of “1” to “170” among the random number values SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern Has been assigned without notice. In addition, a value in the range of “171” to “190” among the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is assigned to the notice YP3-1. Furthermore, a value in the range of “191” to “200” among the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is assigned to the notice YP3-2. On the other hand, corresponding to the variation patterns of special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PH1-3, and special PH1-4, “1” ˜ A value in the range of “70” is assigned without notice. In addition, a value in the range of “71” to “120” of the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is assigned to the notice YP3-1. Furthermore, a value in the range of “121” to “200” is assigned to the notice YP3-2 among the random numbers SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern. Corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of special PG 1-5 and special PH 1-5, a value in the range of “1” to “70” is assigned without notice in the random number SR8-3 for third notice pattern determination. ing. In addition, a value in the range of “71” to “150” among the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is assigned to the notice YP3-1. Furthermore, a value in the range of “151” to “200” is assigned to the notice YP3-2 among the random numbers SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern. Corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, values in the range of “1” to “160” are assigned without notice in the random number value SR8-3 for third notice pattern determination. . A value in the range of “161” to “180” of the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is assigned to the notice YP3-1. Furthermore, a value in the range of “181” to “195” among the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is assigned to the notice YP3-2. A value in the range of “196” to “200” is assigned to the notice YP3-3 among the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern. On the other hand, corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of special PG2-1 and special PG2-2, the value in the range of “1” to “80” of the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern has no notice. Assigned to. Among the random numbers SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern, values in the range of “81” to “110” are assigned to the notice YP3-1. Furthermore, a value in the range of “111” to “120” among the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is assigned to the notice YP3-2. A value in the range of “121” to “200” is assigned to the notice YP3-3 among the random number SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern. With this setting, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the big hit type is “surprise”, and the variable display result is “small hit”. Thus, the ratio of executing the notice effect can be made the same. In particular, special PG1-3, special PG1-4 and special PH1-3, special PH1-4, special PG1-5 and special PH1-5, and special PG3-1 to special PG3-3. And the special PH3-1 to PH3-3 are the same, it becomes difficult to know in advance whether it will be a 2 round big hit state or a sudden fake 15 round big hit state, and it will be a sudden fake 15 round big hit state This makes me feel more surprising. In addition, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” or “surprise probability”, or when the variable display result is a variation pattern corresponding to “small hit”, variable display When the result is “losing”, or when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” and “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the variation pattern corresponds to The ratio of executing the notice effect, the ratio of executing the notice YP3-1, the ratio of executing the notice YP3-3, and the like can be varied. Furthermore, when there is a variation pattern such as special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PH1-3, special PH1-4 corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is any of “0” to “4”, The ratio of executing the notice effect or the notice YP3- when there is a variation pattern such as special PG1-5 and special PH1-5 corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is any of "5" to "8" 2 and the ratio of executing the notice YP3-3 can be made different.

  In addition, in the notice pattern determination table 171C, the random value SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern corresponding to the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 in which the specific effect is executed. Of these, values in the range of “1” to “170” are assigned without notice. On the other hand, the random number SR8-3 having a smaller number than the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5, PA1-7 corresponding to the variation pattern in which the variable display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state is not notified. Assigned to. For example, values in the range of “1” to “160” are assigned without notice corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4. In the other variation patterns that reach the reach state, the random display value SR8− for determining the third notice pattern depends on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” and the type of reach (normal or super). The assignment of 3 is different. On the other hand, non-reach PA1-4, PA1-5 corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PB1-1, and non-reach PC1-1 where the specific effect is not executed. A larger number of random values SR8-3 than the variation pattern of PA1-7 are assigned without notice. In other words, values in the range of “1” to “190” are assigned without notice. With such a setting, the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, compared to the variation pattern in which the decorative display variable display state is the reach state. The ratio of executing the effect is reduced, and the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than that when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is not executed. In addition, when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the specific effect is executed, the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and the variation pattern does not execute the specific effect. Higher reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”) is higher, while the proportion of the decorative display variable display mode is a reachable variation pattern. The ratio of executing a high-priority notice effect is low.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 43A, a notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 43B, various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. It is included. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 43 (A), the display area of the image display device 5 in the period from when the variation of the ornament symbol is started until when the final symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. The data indicating the control contents of various effect operations such as the variable display operation of the decorative design, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation in the specific effect, and the first part of the effect display operation in the sudden effect display It is only necessary to store a plurality of types as patterns. Each symbol variation control pattern includes various effects according to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of control data for controlling the operation, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, timing control switching timing, and the like in time series.

  In the notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 43 (B), data indicating the control content of the effect operation corresponding to the notice effect, such as the effect display operation in the notice effect, corresponding to each of the plurality of types of the notice pattern. However, it is only necessary to store a plurality of types as the notice effect control pattern. Each notice effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations corresponding to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is comprised from data, and the content of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. should just be set in time series. In particular, in the notice effect control patterns of notice CYP1-1 to notice CYP1-4 corresponding to the notice effect of “movable display device”, the control data for operating the movable display device 50, the display screen 51 of the movable display device 50, and the like. Includes effect display control data for displaying a preview image.

  As an example, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notices CYP1-1 to CYP1-4 corresponding to the notice patterns of the notices YP1-1 to YP1-4. . Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-1 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2, and the notice CYP1- The notice effect control pattern 3 corresponds to the notice pattern of notice YP1-3, and the notice effect control pattern of notice CYP1-4 corresponds to the notice pattern of notice YP1-4.

  In the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-1, the movable display device 50 is moved from the normal position to the overlapping position in accordance with the first re-variation of the pseudo-ream, and then the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). The operation of returning to the normal position before is executed once. When the operation is performed at the overlapping position, for example, a “chance” character (image A) is displayed. In the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-1, the movable display device 50 is moved from the normal position to the overlapping position in accordance with the first re-variation of the pseudo-ream, and then the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). The operation of returning to the normal position before is executed once. Then, for example, a character “chance” (image A) is displayed on the display screen 51 when operated at the overlapping position. In the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2, the movable display device 50 is moved from the normal position to the overlapping position in accordance with the first and second re-variations of the pseudo-ream, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in a stop (temporary stop display) ), The operation of returning to the normal position is performed twice, and when the decorative symbol reaches the reach state, the movable display device 50 is moved from the normal position to the overlapping position, and then the display result is derived and displayed. The operation of returning to the normal position is performed. That is, it is moved to the overlapping position three times in total. When the operation is performed at the overlapping position, for example, a character of “chance” (image A), a character of “hot heat!” (Image B), and a character of “super” (image C) are displayed, for example. . In the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-3, the movable display device 50 is moved from the normal position to the overlapping position in accordance with the first change, the second time, and the third change of the pseudo-ream, and then the decorative design is stopped and displayed. The operation of returning to the normal position is performed three times before (temporary stop display), and when the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the movable display device 50 is moved from the normal position to the overlapping position, and then the display result is derived and displayed. The operation of returning to the normal position is executed before being performed. That is, it is moved to the overlapping position four times in total. When operated at overlapping positions, for example, the characters “chance” (image A), the characters “hot” (image B), the characters “reach” (image D), and the characters “super” (Image C) is displayed. In the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-4, the movable display device 50 is moved from the normal position to the overlapping position in accordance with the first change, the second time, and the third change of the pseudo-ream, and then the decorative design is stopped and displayed. The operation of returning to the normal position is performed three times before (temporary stop display), and when the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the movable display device 50 is moved from the normal position to the overlapping position, and then the display result is derived and displayed. The operation of returning to the normal position is executed before being performed. That is, it is moved to the overlapping position four times in total. Then, when operated at overlapping positions, for example, the letters “chance” (image A), the letters “hot”! (Image B), the letters “reach” (image D), and “iron plate!” The character (image E) is displayed. The number of operations and the operation timing of these movable display devices 50 are examples, and the number of operations may be increased or may be operated at different timings. The image displayed on the display screen 51 is also an example, and for example, a character image may be displayed. The number of the notice patterns (notice effect control patterns) is also an example, and at least one notice pattern (notice effect control pattern) for the notice effect of the “movable display device” may be prepared.

  The notice effect control pattern table 181 stores notice effect control patterns of notice CYP2-1 to notice CYP2-4 corresponding to each of the notice patterns of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-1 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1, and ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. . The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-2 displays the effect image of the second step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-2, and ends the notice effect without switching the effect image. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-3 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-3, and after switching the effect image to the effect image of the second step, the notice effect Exit. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-4 displays the effect image of the first step corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-4, switches the effect image to the effect image of the second step, and further the third step. After switching to the effect image, the notice effect is ended.

  In addition, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-1-1 and the notice CYP3-1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-2-1 and the notice CYP3-2-2 are stored corresponding to the notice pattern, and the notice CYP3-3-1 and the notice CYP3-3 are corresponded to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. -2 notice effect control pattern is stored. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-1 displays the effect image before the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-3-2 displays the effect image after the operation of the operation button 30 is detected corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-3.

  In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 44, a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state are stored as the effect control patterns. That's fine. Each effect control pattern includes an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, an audio control data, a lamp control data, an end code, etc. It is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control according to the progress, the switching timing of the effects control, and the like in time series.

  As an example, the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-1 and the hit control CRE1-1 continues from the variable display of the decorative symbols, and a series of surprise effect display that displays an effect image for notifying that “surprise” will be obtained. After executing the latter half of the effect display operation at, the probability change entry display is executed. The effect control pattern of the hit start CST1-3 and the hit control CRD1-3 is a series of the same contents as the hit start CST2-1 and the hit control CRE1-1 effect control pattern, continuously from the variable display of the decorative design. After executing the latter half of the effect display operation in the surprise effect display, the effect display at the start of the big hit is executed. Therefore, when a series of special effects are executed during the period in which the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the content of the production control indicates whether it is controlled to the 15th round big hit state or the two round big hit state. Can not be recognized by the player.

  For example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 45 is provided in the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 5 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 45 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers that are used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 5 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various kinds of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the timing of switching effect images to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes an input port for taking in various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30, and effect control. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the substrate 12. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. Is output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is generated from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the previous power supply stop. When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 46 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to detect input from each switch 21, 22A, 22B, 23, etc. via the switch circuit 110. The state of the signal is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a main random number value update process for updating at least a part of the random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4 and the like used on the main board 11 side by software is executed. (Step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B and setting of the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. When the command control process is finished, the game control timer interrupt process is finished after the interrupt is permitted.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 46 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S100). FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 48, the CPU 103 first corresponds to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A among the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A provided in the ON state is on (step S201). At this time, if the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201; Yes), the first hold storage corresponding to the number of hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. It is determined whether or not the number is a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 may identify the first reserved memory number by reading the value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (first reserved memory number count value).

  If the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the first reserved memory number count value ( Step S203). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step) S204). Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, whereby each random number value is stored (step S205). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address (first address) of the first start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, etc., to transmit the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S206). The first start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 46 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After executing the processing of step S206, for example, by adding 1 to the value of the total reserved memory number counter (total reserved memory number count value) provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, the total reserved memory number is set to 1. Add (step S207). Then, “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (step S208). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved memory number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S209). . The reserved memory number notification command set in this way follows the first start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 46 after the special symbol process process is completed. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  If the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; No), or if the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes) ) Or, after the process of step S209 is executed, the detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the ON state. Is determined (step S210). At this time, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in an OFF state (step S210; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the on state (step S210; Yes), it corresponds to the number of the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S211). At this time, the CPU 103 may specify the second reserved memory number by reading the value of the second reserved memory number counter (second reserved memory number count value) provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S211 (step S211; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S211; No), the second reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the second reserved memory number count value. (Step S212). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step) S213). Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, whereby each random number value is stored (step S214). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the second start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed. (Step S215). The second start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 46 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After the process of step S215 is executed, the total reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (step S216), for example, by adding 1 to the total reserved memory number count value. Then, “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (step S217). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S218). . The reserved memory number notification command set in this way follows the second start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 46 after the special symbol process is completed. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. After executing the start winning determination process as described above, one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 shown in FIG. 47 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether the variable display result of the special symbol, the decorative symbol, the color symbol, etc. is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. A determination is made whether or not. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process is based on the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the determination result of whether or not the variable display state of the decorative design is the reach state, etc. Thus, a process of determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like are included.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the special figure variation time is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, a determination is made as to whether one of the big hit flag and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. If the big hit flag is on, the special process flag is set. The value is updated to “4”, and when the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included.

  The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. And when returning a special winning opening to a closed state, the process etc. which stop supply of the drive signal with respect to a predetermined solenoid should just be performed.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, This includes a process for making a setting for transmitting an end designation command when hit. The special figure process flag value is updated to “7” when the maximum winning opening number is reached, and the special process flag value is updated to “7” when the maximum winning opening number is not reached. Update to 4 ".

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. This jackpot end process corresponds to a period in which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state by the effect electric parts such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. For example, a process for waiting until the waiting time has elapsed and a process for performing various settings corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, the maximum value of the number of times that the big prize opening is opened is “0” because the variable display result is “small hit”, and the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened is set to “0. “5 seconds” may be set.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to a predetermined solenoid may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In the small hit end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is performed by the electric parts for effects such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9. Processing that waits until the time has passed is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 103 first sums the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number based on the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. It is determined whether or not the total pending storage number as a value is “0” (step S231). At this time, if the total reserved storage number is other than “0” (step S231; No), the start data is read from the start data storage unit 151C (step S232). At this time, the start data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the start data storage unit 151C may be read.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the total reserved memory number count value, the total reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the start data storage unit 151C receives the hold number “1”. The storage contents of the start data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted up by one entry (step S233). Then, it is determined whether the start data read in step S232 is “first” or “second” (step S234).

  When it is determined in step S234 that the start data is “first” (step S234; first), the first special figure hold storage unit 151A stores the hold data in association with the hold number “1”. As the hold data, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type are respectively read (step S235). At this time, for example, the first reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the first reserved memory number is updated to be decremented by 1, and the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A uses the reserved number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S236). Then, in response to starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the value of the special fluctuation designation buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (the fluctuation special figure) The designated buffer value) is set to “1” (step S237).

  After the process of step S237 is executed, a first table shown in FIG. 12A is used as a usage table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. The figure display result determination table 130A is selected and set (step S238). For example, in the process of step S238, the storage address (first address) of the first special figure display result determination table 130A in the ROM 101 may be set in a determination table pointer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The CPU 103 refers to the first special figure display result determination table 130A set in this way, whereby the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for special figure display result determination read in step S235 is the big hit determination value data. (Step S239).

  If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the jackpot determination value data in step S239 (step S239; No), the numerical value indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination read in step S235. It is determined whether or not the data matches the small hit determination value data (step S240). At this time, if it matches with the small hit determination value data (step S240; Yes), the small hit flag is set to the on state (step S241).

  If it is determined in step S234 that the start data is “second” (step S234; second), the second special figure hold storage unit 151B stores the hold data in association with the hold number “1”. As the hold data, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S242). At this time, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory number count value, the second reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B uses the reserved number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S243). Then, in response to starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (step S244).

  After the process of step S244 is executed, a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12B is used as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”. 130B is selected and set (step S245). For example, in the process of step S245, the storage address of the second special figure display result determination table 130B in the ROM 101 may be set in the determination table pointer or the like. The CPU 103 refers to the second special figure display result determination table 130B set in this way, whereby the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for special figure display result determination read in step S242 is the big hit determination value data. (Step S246).

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the jackpot determination value data in step S239 or step S246 (step S239; Yes, or step S246; Yes), the jackpot provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 The flag is set to an on state (step S247). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 13 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S248). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the big hit type determination random value MR2-1 read in step S235 or step S242, the big hit type is determined by referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in step S248. It is determined as one of a plurality of types of “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”, “fourth probability variation”, and “surprising probability” (step S249). When the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S244, the big hit type determination table 131 determines the big hit type for the big hit types of “fourth probability change” and “surprise”. Since the random value MR2-1 is not assigned, the big hit type is not determined to be “fourth probability variation” or “surprise accuracy”. Corresponding to the big hit type determined in step S249, the big hit type buffer value is set to any one of “00” to “05” (step S250).

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the small hit determination value data at step S240 (step S240; No), or when the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data at step S246 ( Step S246; No) Or, after executing one of the processes of Step S241 and Step S250, a fixed special symbol is set corresponding to the result of determining the variable display result or determining the jackpot type ( Step S252). As an example, if the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the small hit determination value data in step S240, or if the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data in step S246, it is variable. Corresponding to the determination result that the display result is “lost”, the special symbol indicating the “−” symbol that becomes the lost symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the small hit determination value data in step S240, the small hit symbol is obtained corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “5” is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, when the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the big hit determination value data in step S239 or step S246, “1”, “3”, which become the big hit symbols, according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S249. ”Or“ 7 ”, one of the special symbols indicating the number is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “normal”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the normal jackpot symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is any one of “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability variation big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “surprise”, the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two round big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S252, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S253), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S254), and the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 50, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the table selection shown in FIG. 15 (F) is performed based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state. According to the setting, one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S262). Here, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified from the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S263). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), the table shown in FIG. 16D is based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state. In accordance with the selection setting, any one of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S264).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S263 (step S263; No), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, FIG. In accordance with the table selection setting shown in FIG. 6, any one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state (step S265). At this time, for example, the total reserved memory number is specified by reading the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S266). Subsequently, a random value MR2-2 for reach determination is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S267). Then, based on the reach determination random number MR2-2 extracted in step S267, the presence or absence of the reach state is determined by referring to any of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C set in step S265 (step S265). S268).

  If a determination result indicating that there is a reach state is obtained in step S268 (step S269; Yes). In order to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the determination result of the reach state such as the determination results of reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 in step S268. As the use table, one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected and set (step S270). On the other hand, when a determination result indicating that there is no reach state is obtained in step S268 (step S269; No), non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5 and non-reach HB1- in step S268. As a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the determination result of no reach state such as the determination result of 1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2 Then, any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected and set (step S271).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S272). ). Then, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S272, by referring to the use table set in any of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, a plurality of variation pattern types can be selected. Either one is determined (step S273).

  Here, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol on the basis that the first starting condition is satisfied. Whether to determine the type, or to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Regardless of this, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by using numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 used for determination of the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the numerical value data indicating the common random number MR3 used for determining the variation pattern type is used to change by the common processing module regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268. The pattern type can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S273, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S273, hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D are used as use tables for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type. And one of a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables such as loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B are selected and set (step S274). Subsequently, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S275). Then, based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S275, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S274 (step S276). .

  Here, in the processes of steps S275 and S276, the decorative symbol variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol when the first start condition is satisfied. Whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Instead, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 used for determining the variation pattern updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing in steps S275 and S276, the variation pattern is detected by the common processing module using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268. Can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S276, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  Following the determination of the variation pattern in step S276, a special figure variation time corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern is set (step S277). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S278). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After the process of step S278 is executed, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the change of the special symbol are performed (step S279). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by a transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 Stored in the designated buffer area. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. When such setting in step S279 is performed, every time the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 46 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 applies to the effect control board 12. The first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the variable display result notification command are sequentially transmitted.

  Following the setting in step S279, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S280), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 51, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Should be stored in. Thereafter, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S294). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S295). For example, in step S295, a process for clearing the probability variation flag and the time-shortage flag to turn it off, a process for clearing a special-figure variation number counter for counting the number of times the special figure game is executed in the probability variation state and the time-shortage state, etc. It only has to be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S296), and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S297). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (step S297; Yes), a small hit start start waiting time is set (step S298). For example, in the process of step S298, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the small hitting start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer.

  Subsequent to the process of step S298, as in the process of step S293, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S299). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S300). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S301).

  If the small hit flag is off in step S297 (step S297; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S302). . After executing one of the processes in steps S301 and S302, it is determined whether or not to end the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S303). For example, in the process of step S303, the value of the special figure fluctuation number counter (special figure fluctuation number count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, and the updated special figure fluctuation number count value is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not the special game state end determination value is met. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the probability variation state or the time reduction state may be terminated by clearing the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag, etc., and controlled to the normal state. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the special game state end determination value, the state of the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S303 may be ended. After executing the end determination of the probability variation state or the short time state, the special symbol stop process ends. Note that the end determination based on the special figure variation count value may be performed only in the short-time state, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. . Alternatively, for example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability change state end from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 and referring to a probability change state end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101 or the like Further, it may be determined whether or not to end the probability variation state.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the pre-opening process for the big prize opening executed in step S114 of FIG. 52, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit start flag is on (step S311). Here, the big hit start time flag is set to the on state in response to the big hit flag being on in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. If the big hit start time flag is on in step S311 (step S311; Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit start time effect is on standby (step S312). As an example, in the special symbol stop process in step S113 shown in FIG. 47, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit start production waiting time is Set to the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, it is determined that the big hit start effect is waiting in response to the game control process timer value not matching a predetermined standby time elapsed determination value (eg, “0”, etc.). Corresponding to the match, it may be determined that the big hit start time production is not waiting.

  If it is waiting for the big hit start effect in step S312 (step S312; Yes), for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like (step S313), and the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is ended. To do. On the other hand, when it is not waiting for the big hit start effect at step S292 (step S312; No), the big hit start time flag is cleared (step S314), and the big win opening number counter is cleared. (Step S315), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (Step S316).

  Subsequently, an opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value read in step S316 is set (step S317). At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 53A, if the big hit type buffer value is any one of “00” to “03”, the release control pattern of the release KP1 is set. If the jackpot type buffer value is “04”, the release control pattern of the release KP2 is set. If the jackpot type buffer value is “05”, the release control pattern of the release KP3 is set and the jackpot type buffer value is set. Is “06”, the release control pattern of release KP5 is set, and if the big hit type buffer value is “07”, the release control pattern of release KP4 is set.

  After the process of step S317 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is waiting until the next prize opening is opened in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step S318). As an example, in the process of step S318, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next release waiting end determination value. For example, it may be determined that it is not waiting for next opening. If it is in the next release waiting state in step S318 (step S318; Yes), the process proceeds to step S313 and the game control process timer value is updated. Note that the game control process timer value updated in step S313 is the time set as the big hit start waiting time in step S292 shown in FIG. 51, or in the post-opening process of the big winning opening in step S116 shown in FIG. The time set as an interval time between rounds (for example, 0.5 seconds).

  If it is determined in step S318 that it is not waiting for the next opening (step S318; No), the winning combination corresponding to the opening control pattern set in step S317 and the count value in the winning prize opening number counter is displayed. Settings are made to open the mouth (step S319). As an example, in the process of step S319, a special winning prize ball apparatus 7 formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set by setting a timer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening time in the game control process timer. The big winning opening opening time which is the upper limit of the time for opening the mouth is set. Also, for example, when a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined big prize opening door solenoid is started to be output via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the big winning opening door solenoid for opening the big winning opening is turned on. Setting to be in the state is performed.

  At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), if the opening control pattern of the opening KP1 is set in step S317, the count value in the special winning opening opening number counter is “1” to “15”. In any case, a timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds is set in the game control process timer as the big prize opening time. Further, when the opening control pattern for the opening KP4 is set, the winning opening opening time is 0.5 seconds when the count value in the winning opening opening counter is “1” or “2”. A timer initial value corresponding to is set in the game control process timer. On the other hand, when the opening control pattern of opening KP2, opening KP3, or opening KP5 is set, when the count value in the winning prize opening number counter is “1”, the winning opening opening time is 30.0. A timer initial value corresponding to the second is set in the game control process timer. Further, when the count value in the special prize opening number counter is any of “2” to “15”, the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds is set in the game control process timer as the special prize opening time. Is done.

  Then, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a special winning opening opening designation command to the effect control board 12 (step S320). After the process of step S320 is executed, it is updated by adding 1 to the winning prize opening number count value (step S321), and the value of the special process flag is set to a value corresponding to the winning prize opening process. After updating to “5” (step S322), the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is terminated.

  54 and 55 are flowcharts showing an example of the special winning opening opening process executed in step S115 of FIG. 54 and 55, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has been won at the special winning opening by, for example, determining whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. Is determined (step S331). If there is no game ball winning in the grand prize opening in step S331 (step S331; No), the process proceeds to step S334.

  On the other hand, if there is a game ball winning in the big winning opening in step S331 (step S331; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it (step S332). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S333). If the winning number count value is not the predetermined number (step S333; No), the game control process timer value is decremented by 1 and updated (step S334), and then the release control pattern set in step S317 is released. It is determined whether or not the opening control pattern is KP4 (step S335).

  If it is determined in step S335 that the release control pattern is the release KP4 (step S335; Yes), for example, whether or not the game control process timer value matches the timer value corresponding to 0.5 seconds. Accordingly, it is determined whether or not 0.5 second has elapsed since the special winning opening was opened (step S336). At this time, if 0.5 second has not elapsed (step S336; No), the process for opening the special prize opening is ended as it is.

  If it is not the opening control pattern of the opening KP4 in step S335 (step S335; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the opening control pattern set in step S317 is the opening control pattern of the opening KP1 ( Step S337). When it is determined in step S337 that the opening control pattern is not the opening KP1 (step S337; No), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening count value is “1” (step S338).

  If it is determined in step S337 that the opening control pattern is the opening KP1, (step S337; Yes), it is determined in step S338 that the winning prize opening number count value is a value other than “1”. In this case (step S338; No), for example, depending on whether or not the game control process timer value matches the timer value corresponding to 29.5 seconds, 29.5 seconds may have elapsed after opening the big prize opening. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (step S339). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step S339; No), the process for opening the special prize opening is ended as it is.

  When it is determined in step S338 that the winning prize opening number count value is “1” (step S338; Yes), the opening control pattern set in step S317 is the opening control pattern of the opening KP5. It is determined whether or not there is (step S338A). If it is not the opening control pattern of opening KP5 (step S338A; No), for example, depending on whether or not the game control process timer value matches the timer value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, the big prize opening is first opened. Then, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time after that is 0.5 seconds (step S340). At this time, if the elapsed time is 0.5 seconds (step S340; Yes), for example, the output of a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined large prize opening door solenoid is stopped via a predetermined solenoid circuit. Setting is made to turn off the large winning opening door solenoid for closing the winning opening (step S341).

  If it is determined in step S340 that the elapsed time from the first opening of the grand prize opening is not 0.5 seconds (step S340; No), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 1.0 seconds. Depending on whether or not the timer value matches the timer value, whether or not the elapsed time from the first opening of the big prize opening is 1.0 second, that is, 0. It is determined whether or not 5 seconds have elapsed (step S342). At this time, if the elapsed time is 1.0 second (step S342; Yes), it is assumed that 0.5 second has elapsed since the closing of the big winning opening, for example, a predetermined winning prize opening via a predetermined solenoid circuit. For example, by starting to output a solenoid drive signal for the door solenoid, a setting is made to turn on the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening (step S343).

  When it is determined in step S342 that the elapsed time from the first opening of the grand prize opening is not 1.0 second (step S342; No), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 1.5 seconds. Whether the elapsed time from the first opening of the grand prize opening is 1.5 seconds or not, that is, 0 after the big prize opening is opened again, depending on whether or not the timer value is met. It is determined whether or not 5 seconds have elapsed (step S344). At this time, if the elapsed time is 1.5 seconds (step S344; Yes), for example, the output of a solenoid driving signal for a predetermined large prize opening door solenoid is stopped through a predetermined solenoid circuit. A setting is made to turn off the large winning opening door solenoid for closing the winning opening (step S345).

  When it is determined in step S344 that the elapsed time from the first opening of the grand prize opening is not 1.5 seconds (step S344; No), the release control pattern set in step S317 is released. It is determined whether or not it is the KP2 release control pattern (step S346 in FIG. 55). If it is determined that the release control pattern is the release KP2 (step S346; Yes), for example, depending on whether or not the game control process timer value matches the timer value corresponding to 2.5 seconds, etc. It is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the first opening of the winning opening is 2.5 seconds, that is, whether or not 1.0 second has elapsed since the closing of the large winning opening (step S347). . At this time, if the elapsed time is 2.5 seconds (step S347; Yes), it is assumed that 1.0 second has elapsed since the closing of the large winning opening, for example, a predetermined large winning opening via a predetermined solenoid circuit. For example, by starting to output a solenoid drive signal for the door solenoid, a setting is made to turn on the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening (step S348).

  Further, when it is determined in step S346 that the opening control pattern is not the opening KP2, that is, when it is determined that the opening control pattern is the opening KP3 (step S346; No), for example, the game control process timer value is set. Depending on whether or not the timer value corresponding to 3.5 seconds has been met, whether or not the elapsed time from the first opening of the big prize opening is 3.5 seconds, that is, the big prize opening It is determined whether 2.0 seconds have elapsed since the closing (step S349). At this time, if the elapsed time is 3.5 seconds (step S349; Yes), it is assumed that 1.0 second has elapsed since the closing of the big prize opening, for example, a predetermined big winning opening via a predetermined solenoid circuit. For example, by starting to output a solenoid drive signal for the door solenoid, a setting is made to turn on the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening (step S348).

  If it is the release control pattern of the release KP5 in step S338A (step S338A; Yes), for example, depending on whether or not the game control process timer value matches the timer value corresponding to 1.0 seconds, etc. It is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the first opening is 1.0 second (step S355). At this time, if the elapsed time is 1.0 second (step S355; Yes), for example, the output of a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined big prize opening door solenoid is stopped through a predetermined solenoid circuit. A setting is made to turn off the large winning opening door solenoid for closing the winning opening (step S356).

  If it is determined in step S355 that the elapsed time from the first opening of the grand prize opening is not 1.0 second (step S355; No), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 1.5 seconds. Whether or not the elapsed time from the first opening of the grand prize opening is 1.5 seconds depending on whether or not the timer value matches the timer value, that is, 0. It is determined whether or not 5 seconds have elapsed (step S357). At this time, if the elapsed time is 1.5 seconds (step S357; Yes), it is assumed that 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the big prize opening was closed. For example, a predetermined big prize opening is given via a predetermined solenoid circuit. For example, by starting to output a solenoid drive signal for the door solenoid, a setting is made to turn on the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening (step S358).

  If it is determined in step S357 that the elapsed time from the first opening of the grand prize opening is not 1.5 seconds (step S357; No), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 2.0 seconds. Depending on whether or not it matches the timer value to be played, whether or not the elapsed time from the first opening of the big prize opening is 2.0 seconds, that is, 0 after the big prize opening is opened again It is determined whether or not 5 seconds have elapsed (step S359). At this time, if the elapsed time is 2.0 seconds (step S359; Yes), for example, the output of the solenoid drive signal for a predetermined large prize opening door solenoid is stopped through a predetermined solenoid circuit. Setting is made to turn off the large winning opening door solenoid for closing the winning opening (step S360).

  If it is determined in step S359 that the elapsed time from the first opening of the grand prize opening is not 2.0 seconds (step S359; No), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 3.0 seconds. Depending on whether or not the timer value matches the timer value, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the first opening of the big prize opening is 3.0 seconds, that is, after the big prize opening is closed. It is determined whether or not 0 second has elapsed (step S361). At this time, if the elapsed time is 3.0 seconds (step S361; Yes), it is assumed that 1.0 second has elapsed since the closing of the big prize opening, for example, a predetermined big winning opening via a predetermined solenoid circuit. For example, by starting to output a solenoid drive signal for the door solenoid, a setting is made to turn on the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening (step S362).

  If it is determined in step S347 that the elapsed time from the first opening of the grand prize opening is not 2.5 seconds (step S347; No), or after the grand prize opening is first opened in step S349. If it is determined that the elapsed time is not 3.5 seconds (step S349; No), if it is determined in step S361 that the elapsed time from the first opening of the grand prize opening is not 3.0 seconds (step) S361; No), for example, the elapsed time from the first opening of the big prize opening is 30.0 seconds depending on whether or not the game control process timer value matches the timer value corresponding to 30.0 seconds. It is determined whether or not (step S350). At this time, if the elapsed time is not 30.0 seconds (step S350; No), the large winning opening open process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S333 that the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (step S333; Yes), 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the large winning opening was opened in step S336. Is determined (step S336; Yes), it is determined in step S339 that 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the opening of the grand prize opening (step S339; Yes), the grand prize opening is determined in step S350. If it is determined that the elapsed time from the first opening is 30.0 seconds (step S350; Yes), for example, a solenoid drive for a predetermined big prize opening door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit While setting the signal to stop the output, the solenoid for the grand prize opening door for closing the grand prize opening is set to the off state ( Step S351), to clear the winning number count value (step S352).

  After executing the process of step S352, the setting for transmitting the designation command after opening the big prize opening to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S353), and the value of the special figure process flag is set after the big prize opening is opened. After updating to “6”, which is a value corresponding to the process (step S354), the special winning opening open process is terminated.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 56, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S371). As an example, in the post-opening process for the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 47, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S371, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and depending on whether or not the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. What is necessary is just to determine whether the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S371 (step S371; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in step S371 (step S371; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S372). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type buffer value read in step S372 is “00” corresponding to the “normal” jackpot type (step S373). At this time, if the big hit type buffer value is “00” (step S373; Yes), the setting for starting the control to the short time state is performed (step S374). As an example, in the process of step S374, the time reduction flag is set to the on state and the count initial value (for example, “100”) determined in advance corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state. May be set in the special figure fluctuation counter.

  When the big hit type buffer value is other than “00” in step S373 (step S373; No), setting for starting control to the probability variation state is performed (step S375). As an example, in the process of step S375, the probability variation flag is set to the on state, and a predetermined count initial value corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the probability variation state is determined as the number of special diagram fluctuations. What is necessary is just to set to a counter.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S374 and S375, the special figure process flag value is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S376), and then the big hit end process is terminated. To do.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S16 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 provided in the passage gate 41 is in an on state, so that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. It is determined whether or not (step S131). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is turned on (step S131; Yes), the process at the time of passing the gate is executed (step S132). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state (step S131; No), the process of step S132 is skipped.

  As an example of the process at the time of passing through the gate executed in step S132, the following process is executed. That is, first, whether or not the number of pending map storages, which is the number of pending data stored in the pending map storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”). Determine whether or not. At this time, if the number of stored customary drawings is an upper limit value, the current game ball detection is invalidated and the process at the time of passing the gate is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of stored customary drawings is less than the upper limit value, for example, the CPU 103 indicates a numerical value indicating a random number value for determining a normal display result from numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter. Extract data. Then, the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value is set as the hold data at the head of the empty entry in the usual hold storage unit. After the above-described processing at the time of passing the gate, or after it is determined in step S131 that the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state, the following processing is performed according to the value of the usual process flag. Each process of steps S140 to S144 is executed.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 20 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the normal symbol storage unit. At this time, for example, if there is pending data stored in the usual figure hold storage unit, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process in step S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination process, based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the normal symbol display result, the normal symbol display result as a variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in the general symbol game is set to “per normal symbol” or “ A determination is made as to whether or not it is “usually lost”. At this time, for example, when one of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag is on, the determination is set so that the ratio of determining “per normal” is higher than when both are off. You may refer to the table. As a result, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is more likely to be “per normal” than in the normal state. The mouth is likely to be in an expanded open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening. Further, in the normal symbol determination process, the universal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the universal symbol display result is also determined. At this time, for example, when either the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is on, the normal variation pattern may be determined such that the normal variation time is shorter than when both are off. This reduces the interval for deriving and displaying the normal symbol variable display result in the normal game in the probability variation state and the short time state. The second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is likely to be in an expanded open state, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, a setting for varying the normal symbol is performed in the general symbol game by the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol that changes based on these settings is displayed as a normal symbol display result that is a variable symbol display result of the normal symbol when the normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed. In the normal symbol variation process, the elapsed time from the start of variation of the normal symbol is measured. At this time, a determination is made as to whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal time fluctuation time determined in accordance with the normal time fluctuation pattern. Then, when the usual figure change time is reached, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 20 is set to stop and display the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol. Note that the setting for stopping and displaying the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is the value of the normal symbol process flag when the measured elapsed time reaches the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol variation process of step S142. It may be performed before updating to “3”. Further, in the normal symbol stop process, when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, for example, for driving the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory connected to the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, for example. After performing the setting for the enlargement / release control in which the movable blade piece is tilted, such as the setting of the normal operation pattern, the value of the normal process flag is updated to “4”. At this time, for example, when either the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is on, a normal operation pattern in which the period and the number of times of performing the expansion opening control are increased as compared with the case where both are off may be set. . As a result, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the period and the number of times that the second start winning opening is in the expanded open state are increased based on the fact that the base map display result is “per base map”, and the game ball is in the second state. It becomes easier to enter the starting prize opening. If the normal map display result is “general map loss”, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “0”.

  The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S144 is executed when the value of the normal process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is moved from the vertical position to the tilt position in response to the variable display result in the ordinary game being “per game”. Thus, setting for changing the second start winning opening from the normal open state to the expanded open state is performed. For example, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, a drive control signal for driving the ordinary electric accessory solenoid is generated according to the setting of the ordinary electric action pattern set in the ordinary symbol stop process in step S143. You can make it. Further, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the elapsed time after the ordinary electric accessory solenoid is driven and the second start winning opening is set to the open expanded state is measured, and the elapsed time is enlarged corresponding to the ordinary electric actuating pattern. A determination is made whether the opening time has been reached. When the elapsed time reaches the expansion opening period, the driving of the ordinary electric utility solenoid is stopped, and the movable wing piece is returned from the tilting position to the vertical position, so that the second start winning opening is in the expansion opening state. Set to change from normal to open state. At this time, the value of the normal process flag may be updated to “0”.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 58 is executed. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 to the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit).

  Thereafter, a random number update process is executed (step S402), and numerical data indicating a random value counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 among various random values used for effect control is displayed by software. Update. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 195. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, an effect control process is executed (step S406). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are performed. The contents of the control of the effect operation using the are determined, determined, set according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  In the command analysis process of step S405, for example, a pending storage increase display process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59 is executed. In the reserved memory increase display process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the reserved memory count notification command transmitted from the main board 11 by, for example, checking the effect control command stored in the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is reception (step S151). At this time, if no pending storage number notification command is received (step S151; No), the pending storage increase display process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S151 that the pending storage number notification command has been received (step S151; Yes), one of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command is selected. It is determined whether the designated command has been received (step S152). Here, it is determined whether or not the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command has been received in the command analysis processing in step S405, and any of the start opening prize designation commands is received. When it is determined that there is a command, a command reception flag corresponding to the received start opening winning designation command may be set to an on state. As an example, when the first start opening prize designation command is received, the first start opening prize designation command reception flag is set to ON, while when the second start opening prize designation command is received, the second start opening prize designation command is set. Sets the specified command reception flag to the on state. In step S152, if either the first start opening prize designation command reception flag or the second start opening prize designation command reception flag is on, it may be determined that the start opening prize designation command has been received.

  If it is determined in step S152 that the start opening winning designation command has been received (step S152; Yes), for example, depending on whether or not the first starting opening winning designation command receiving flag is on, etc. It is determined whether or not the received start opening winning designation command is the first starting opening winning designation command (step S153). At this time, if it is determined that the command is the first start opening winning designation command (step S153; Yes), the reserved storage display in the start winning storage display area 5H is updated corresponding to the increase in the first reserved storage number. Therefore, the first hold display increase update setting is performed (step S154). In this first hold display increase update setting, for example, the first start by the game ball having entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the first start winning opening. Display setting for changing to blue display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such first hold display increase update setting, the hold storage increase display process ends.

  When it is determined in step S153 that the command is the second start opening prize designation command (step S153; No), the reserved memory display in the start prize memory display area 5H corresponding to the increase in the second reserved memory number. 2nd hold display increase update setting for updating is performed (step S155). In the second hold display increase / update setting, for example, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is used for the second start due to the game ball entering the second start winning opening. Display setting for changing to red display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such second hold display increase update setting, the hold storage increase display process ends.

  If it is determined in step S152 that the start opening prize designation command has not been received (step S152; No), the hold storage display in the start prize storage display area 5H is displayed correspondingly when there is no start opening prize designation. Display update setting is performed when no start opening winning designation is specified for updating (step S156). In this display update setting when the start opening prize is not specified, for example, a display setting for changing all of the display parts that are displayed in blue or red in the start prize storage display area 5H to gray display, and a start prize storage display. Display setting for changing one of the display parts that are not displayed in the area 5H to gray display is performed. After performing such a display update setting when no start opening prize designation is made, the on-hold storage increase display process is terminated.

  As described above, when the first hold display increase update setting is performed in step S154 and the second hold display increase update setting is performed in step S155, the hold memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. If either of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command as the start opening winning designation command is normally received, for example, as shown in FIG. In the display area 5H, a first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A based on establishment of the first start condition and a second special figure reservation based on establishment of the second start condition The second reserved memory number, which is the number of stored pending data in the storage unit 151B, can be displayed in an identifiable manner.

  On the other hand, in step S156, the display update setting is performed when no start opening prize designation is made, so that when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the first start opening prize that becomes the start opening prize designation command is received. Based on the determination that neither the designation command nor the second start opening prize designation command has been received, the display mode of the hold storage display in the start prize storage display area 5H is changed to a predetermined display mode, for example, By displaying in gray as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the total reserved memory number can be specified, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number can be displayed so that they cannot be specified. After that, if the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, if the start opening winning designation command is normally received, one of the processes of steps S154 and S155 is executed. A new display corresponding to the received start opening winning designation command can be added while maintaining the display mode in the gray display area. As an example, when the hold memory display as shown in FIG. 60 (B) is being performed, if the hold memory number notification command is received after the first start opening winning designation command is normally received, By performing the first hold display increase update setting in S154, as shown in FIG. 60C, a blue display corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening is added.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the following processes in steps S160 to S166 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example. Run.

  The fluctuation start command reception waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variation start command reception waiting process, the image display device 5 is changed depending on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. Variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area, and “left” and “right” colored symbol display areas 5A. 5B includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of the color symbol in any one of 5B. At this time, if it is determined that variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B In order to perform various production operations including variable display of decorative designs and color designs in response to The process includes determining a pattern, a notice pattern, and the like, and setting a design variation control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and the like based on the determination result. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation process, various controls are performed from the symbol variation control pattern and the preview effect control pattern in accordance with the value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 (effect control process timer value). Processing for reading out data and performing various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols is included. As an example, when any of the notice CYP3-1-1, notice CYP3-2-1, notice CYP3-3-1 is set as the notice effect control pattern in the decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161, the effect The control CPU 120 checks the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 via a predetermined input port included in the I / O 125, and the operation detection signal is in an on state within a predetermined period during which the notice effect can be executed. It is determined whether or not At this time, if the operation detection signal is turned on, for example, the notice CYP3-1-1 is switched to the notice CYP3-1-2, the notice CYP3-2-1 is switched to the notice CYP3-2-2, and the notice CYP3-3 is selected. For example, by changing -1 to the notice CYP3-3-2, the presentation operation in the notice effect is changed. Note that the notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-1-1, notice CYP3-2-1, and notice CYP3-3-1 used before the operation detection signal is turned on are in the display area of the image display device 5. An effect image (for example, an image prompting the operation of the operation button 30) may be displayed, or an effect image may not be displayed. Here, when the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1-1, notice CYP3-2-1, notice CYP3-3-1 displays an effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, each notice effect control. A common effect image may be displayed in the pattern, or different effect images may be displayed. Further, when any of the notice CYP1-1, notice CYP1-2, notice CYP1-3, and notice CYP1-4 is set as the notice effect control pattern in the decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161, these notices are set. In accordance with the effect control pattern, the movable display device 50 is moved from the normal position to the overlapping position at a predetermined timing, and the effect image is displayed on the display screen 51 when operated to the overlapping position. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The decorative symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “4” when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”. Is done. On the other hand, when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “small hit”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound effect sound signal is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on by outputting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state such as turning off / off / flashing. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The effect process during small hit control in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the effect process during the small hit control, for example, an effect control pattern is set in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the image display device 5. Displaying sound in the area, outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound effect signals to the sound control board 13, and playing the game effect lamp 9 and decorations by outputting electric decoration signals to the lamp control board 14 Processing for controlling various performance operations in the small hit gaming state such as turning on / off / flashing the LED is included. As an example, in the effect process during small hit control in step S165, the effect control patterns of the hit start CST2-2 and the hit control CRE1-2 shown in FIG. Reading from the pattern table 182 and setting the production control process timer. Thereafter, various settings for controlling the rendering operation may be performed in accordance with the control data read from the rendering control pattern according to the rendering control process timer value. The effect operation executed by such a setting may be an effect operation common to both the accuracy and the small hit, which may be executed even when the big hit type is “Accuracy”. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S166 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound effect signals to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration LEDs are turned on / off by output of electric decoration signals to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, such as blinking / flashing. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the end of the effect operation.

  62 and 63 are flowcharts showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “losing” by, for example, reading the EXT data of the variable display result notification command (FIG. 62). Step S501). At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (step S501; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern sets the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of "" (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S502; Yes), the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye”. It is determined whether or not (step S503). As an example, if it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, if the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-7 (see FIG. 10). It is determined that the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development chance”.

  When it is determined in step S503 that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” (step S503; Yes), the final stop symbol constituting any of the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8 and A combination of determined decorative symbols is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 27D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1- 5, The combination of FZ1-6 is determined as a definitive decorative symbol.

  If it is determined in step S503 that the pattern is not a variation pattern that executes the specific effect of “end of development chance” (step S503; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination Is determined (step S505). As an example, in the process of step S505, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 27A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 27B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 27C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the extracted random number value SR1-3 and the left / right outcome type DC1-1, the final stop symbol determination table 160C is referred to determine a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In this way, in the process of step S505, with reference to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the decorative symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. Therefore, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols does not become the reach combination or the big hit combination, and even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in (B), the chances of success TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 7C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. 29 are not obtained.

  When it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach combination is determined (step S506). As an example, in the process of step S506, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 30A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the same decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are displayed. decide. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 30B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number values SR1-3, the decorative symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2- The design difference from the decorative design of 3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  Thus, in the process of step S506, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” ornament symbol display area 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. The decorative symbols to be the left and right final stopped symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined. After that, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2- in the “medium” ornament symbol display area 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. 1, the design difference with the decorative design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the decorative design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  When the variable display result is other than “losing” in step S501 (step S501; No), the variable display result is “small hit”, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the big hit type is “first hit”. It is determined whether it is either “4 probability change”, or the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or any other (step S507). ). At this time, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, or the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is If it is “surprising” (step S507; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the fluctuation pattern designation command, the designated fluctuation pattern is special PG1-1 to special PG1-6, special PH1-3. It is determined whether the pattern is one of the special PH1-5 fluctuation patterns or other patterns (step S508). Here, as shown in FIG. 11, all of the variation patterns of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-6 and the special PH1-3 to the special PH1-5 are set to “non-reach”. Is specified. Therefore, when it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is any of special PG1-1 to special PG1-6, special PH1-3 to special PH1-5 (step S508; Yes), FIG. The process proceeds to the process of step S503 shown, and the finalized symbol to be the final stop symbol is determined by one of the processes of steps S504 and S505. If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is any one of special PG1-1 to special PG1-6, special PH1-3 to special PH1-5, the process of step S503 shown in FIG. 62 is performed. If the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern of the special PG 1-6 (see FIG. 11), it is determined that the variation pattern executes the specific effect of “end of development chance”. It will be.

  If it is determined in step S508 of FIG. 63 that the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern of special PG1-1 to special PG1-6 and special PH1-3 to special PH1-5 (step S508; No), the designated variation is performed. Determine whether the pattern is one of special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PG3-2, special PG3-3, special PH3-2, special PH3-3, or any other variation pattern (Step S509). Here, as shown in FIG. 11, the variation patterns of the special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PG3-2, special PG3-3, special PH3-2, and special PH3-3 are all variable decorative patterns. After the display state is set to the reach state, “normal” reach production is specified. Therefore, if it is determined in step S509 that the variation pattern is any of special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PG3-2, special PG3-3, special PH3-2, and special PH3-3. (Step S509; Yes), the process proceeds to the process of Step S506 shown in FIG. 62, and the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined.

  If it is determined in step S509 in FIG. 63 that the variation pattern is other than the special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PG3-2, special PG3-3, special PH3-2, and special PH3-3 variation patterns ( Step S509; No), the specified variation pattern is either the variation pattern of the special PG3-1 or the special PH3-1. Here, as shown in FIG. 11, the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 and the special PH 3-1 are both determined chance combinations TC1 to TC4, and combinations of confirmed decorative symbols that result in variable display of decorative symbols. It is specified to do. Corresponding to the designation of one of these special PG3-1 and special PH3-1 variation patterns, the combination of the fixed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting any one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is determined. (Step S510). As an example, in the process of step S510, when the specified variation pattern includes the special PG 3-1, the final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. If there is 1, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 31C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4- that become any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4 are obtained. 2, The combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the processing of step S510, the special PG3-1 to special PG3- are not referred to without referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 31C or the final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. 3. Either one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is configured in advance by setting any one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns of the special PH 3-1 to the special PH 3-3. You may make it determine the combination of the fixed decoration symbol used as the last stop symbol to perform.

  In step S507, when the variable display result is not “small hit” and the big hit type is neither “fourth probability variation” nor “surprise” (step S507; No), the variable display result is “big hit”. Of these, it is determined whether the jackpot type is any one of “normal jackpot” and “third probability variation” or any other (step S511). At this time, when the big hit type is “ordinary big hit” or when the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S511; Yes), the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the normal big hit combination. Is determined (step S512). As an example, in the process of step S512, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 31A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  When the big hit type is neither “normal” nor “third probability variation” in step S511 (step S511; No), the big hit type corresponds to either “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”. Then, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the probability variation big hit combination is determined (step S513). As an example, in the process of step S513, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 31B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S504, S505, and S506 in FIG. 62, or after performing any of the processes of steps S510, S512, and S513 in FIG. 63, the specific effect setting process is performed (steps). S514). FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the specific effect setting process executed in step S514. In this specific effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern having no specific effect (step S551). At this time, if the variation pattern has no specific effect (step S551; Yes), the specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

  When it is determined in step S551 that the variation pattern has a specific effect (step S551; No), the specific effect is either “slip” or “intro”, or other specific effects. It is determined whether it exists (step S552). At this time, if it is any one of the specific effects “slip” and “intro”, the specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect is selected and set as the use table (step S553). As an example, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 32A is set in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, and the specific effect shown in FIG. 32B in the case of a specific effect of “intro”. An effect pattern determination table 164C is set.

  Following the process of step S553, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S554). For example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, numerical data indicating the random value SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. To do. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is selected from the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A set in step S552. To decide. In the case of the “Intro” specific effect, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. At this time, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is read. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR6-3 and the previous effect buffer value, when the variation pattern is other than non-reach PA 1-6, Based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-3, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164C.

  After the determination in step S554, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is “intro” (step S555). If the specific effect is “intro” (step S555; Yes), step S554 is performed. The previous effect buffer value is updated with the previous effect buffer update setting value in the specific effect pattern determination table 164C in accordance with the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 determined in (Step S556). For example, if the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “1”. On the other hand, when the specific effect pattern of the intro TP3-2 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “2”. When the specific effect pattern of the intro TP3-3 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “3”.

  By executing the processing of step S556 in this way, the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 prepared for each type of effect operation corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “intro” is displayed. Each time it is determined, the previous effect buffer value corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the determined intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 can be updated. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined as one of a plurality of types, the determined type of effect operation can be stored as the previous effect buffer value in an updatable manner. And in the process of step S554, when it is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-6, the previous effect buffer value is read and the determination using the specific effect pattern determination table 164C as shown in FIG. 32 (B) is performed. Thus, the specific effect pattern can be determined so that the same type of effect operation as the effect operation type stored as the previous effect buffer value is not executed.

  When it is determined in step S552 that the specific effect is other than “slip” or “intro” (step S552; No), or when it is determined in step S555 that the specific effect is other than “intro” (step) S555; No), or after executing the process of step S556, the specific effect is any one of “slip”, “pseudo-ream”, “expansion chance”, or other specific effects Is determined (step S557). At this time, if it is a specific effect other than “slip”, “pseudo-run”, and “expansion chance” (step S557; No), the specific effect setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is one of the specific effects of “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, and “expansion chance” (step S557; Yes), the temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the specific effect is determined. (Step S558), the specific effect setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S558, as an example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, a temporary stop symbol determination table according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 34E based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S554. One of 166A to 166D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to any of the set temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the extracted random number SR3, the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, the right temporary stop symbol 1 -3, the decorative symbol to be one of the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 is determined.

  As another example, in the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, first, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is set to a constant M based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. For example, when the variation pattern is any one of non-reach PA1-5, special PG1-5, and special PH1-5, the constant M is set to “1”, and super PA3-4, super PA3-9, super When the variation pattern is any one of PA4-4, Super PA4-9, Super PA5-4, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Special PG1-3, Special PH1-3, The constant M is set to “2”, and super PA3-5, super PA3-10, super PA4-5, super PA4-10, super PA5-5, super PB3-5, super PB4-5, super PB5-5, If the variation pattern is any one of the super PF1-1, special PG1-4, and special PH1-4, the constant M is set to “3”. At this time, a variable N indicating the determined number of temporary stop symbol combinations is set to “0”. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 35A is selected and set as the use table, while the variation pattern is super PA3-4, super PA3-5, super PA3-9, super PA3-10, super PA4-4, super PA4-5, super PA4-9, super PA4-10, super PA5-4, super PA5-5, super PB3-4, super In the case of any of PB3-5, super PB4-4, super PB4-5, super PB5-4, super PB5-5, and super PF1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. Select and set as the use table. If the variation pattern is special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PH1-3, or special PH1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is either special PG 1-5 or special PH 1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 35D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to any of the set temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR4-1, the left middle right temporary which becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 The combination of stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167E shown in FIG. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167E based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3 that become one of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8. -2, KZ3-3 combination is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167F shown in FIG. 35 (F) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167F based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, KZ4, which becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2 and a combination of KZ4-3 are determined. After determining the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated.

  As another example, in the case of a specific effect of “Development Chance”, the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 37 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 based on the extracted random value SR3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3 that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 are displayed. Determine the combination.

  After executing the specific effect setting process as described above at step S514 shown in FIG. 62, the changing promotion effect setting process is executed (step S515). FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing promotion effect setting process executed in step S515. In this changing promotion effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” or not. (Step S571). At this time, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” (step S571; No), the changing promotion effect setting processing is ended as it is.

  When it is determined in step S571 that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “probability” (step S571; Yes), the variation shown in FIG. The promotion effect execution determination table 165A is selected and set as a use table (step S572). Subsequently, for example, numeric data indicating the random value SR5 for promotion effect execution determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S573). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S573, referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A set in step S572, the jackpot type is “normal”, “first certain change”. The presence or absence of a fostering promotion effect is determined according to which of the “fourth probability change” (step S574). At this time, if it is determined that there is no changing promotion effect (step S575; No), the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S574 that there is a changing promotion effect (step S575; Yes), a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the changing promotion effect is determined (step S576). Then, the changing promotion effect setting process ends. In the process of step S576, as an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 38 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 based on the extracted numerical data indicating the random number SR2, the decorative symbols determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are displayed. The combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 is determined according to the symbol number.

  After executing the changing promotion effect setting process as described above in step S515 shown in FIG. 62, the notice effect setting process is executed (step S516). FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the notice effect setting process executed in step S516. In the notice effect setting process, first, the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 39 is selected and set as a use table (step S591). Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR7 for determining the notice pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S592). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR7 extracted in step S592, by referring to the notice pattern type determination table 170, there is no notice or the notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3 according to the variation pattern. (Step S593). At this time, if it is determined that there is no notice (step S594; Yes), the notice effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S593 that one of the notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3 (step S594; No), the notice pattern determination table 171A shown in FIG. 41, the notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 41 and the notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 42 are selected and set as a use table (step S595). That is, when the notice pattern type of the notice CY1 is decided in step S593, the notice pattern decision table 171A is set. When the notice pattern type of the notice CY2 is decided, the notice pattern decision table 171B is set. When the notice pattern type of the notice CY3 is determined, the notice pattern determination table 171C is set. Thereafter, the notice pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S596), and the notice effect setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S596, for example, when the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY1, for example, a random number SR8-1 for determining the first notice pattern is obtained from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example. The numerical data indicating is extracted. Then, based on the numeric data indicating the extracted random number SR8-1, the notice pattern determination table 171A set in step S595 is referred to, so that there is no notice or the notice patterns of notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-4. Decide on either.

  As another example, when the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY2, for example, a numerical value indicating the random value SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Extract data. Then, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 171B set in step S595 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR8-2, no notice or notice patterns of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4. Decide on either.

  As another example, when the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY3, a random value SR8-3 for determining the third notice pattern is shown from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example. Extract numerical data. Then, by referring to the notice pattern determination table 171C set in step S595 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR8-3, no notice or notice patterns of notice YP3-1 to notice YP3-3. Decide on either.

  After executing the notice effect setting process as described above in step S516 shown in FIG. 62, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S517). At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control, for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect pattern determined in step S554 shown in FIG. 64, or the variation determined in step S574 shown in FIG. Corresponding to the presence / absence of the promotion effect, one of a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 43A is selected and set as a usage pattern. Further, for example, in response to the notice pattern determined in step S596 shown in FIG. 66, any one of a plurality of kinds of notice effect control patterns stored in the notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. Select and set as usage pattern.

  Following the processing in step S517, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 corresponding to the effect control process timer setting value indicated in the symbol variation control pattern set in step S517. Is set (step S518). Then, for example, by supplying a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern to the display control unit 123, the “left” and “middle” provided in the display area of the image display device 5 are provided. , The decorative symbols start to change in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the color symbols change in either the “left” or “right” colored symbol display areas 5A, 5B. Is set to start the variation of various symbols in the image display device 5 (step S519). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S520), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  In the decorative symbol variation setting process, for example, a process of determining a definite color symbol may be performed before the process of step S519 is performed. At this time, depending on which of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is transmitted from the main board 11, the determined color symbols in the “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B are displayed. decide. For example, in the case of determining the determined color symbol in the “left” color symbol display area 5A according to the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “ In the case of determining the color design of “blue” and determining the determined color design in the “right” color design display area 5B, the color design of “red” or “blue” may be determined.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit control effect processing executed in step S164 of FIG. In the effect processing during the big hit control, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S601). At this time, if a hit end designation command is received (step S601; Yes), a setting for ending the big hit effect that is performed corresponding to the big hit gaming state is made (step S602), and the value of the production process flag is set. After updating to “6” corresponding to the ending effect process (step S603), the big hit control effect process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S602, a predetermined display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123, a predetermined sound effect signal is transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a predetermined electrical decoration signal is transmitted. It is only necessary to perform control to end the effect operation that is the effect during the big hit by transmitting to the lamp control board 14 or the like.

  If no hit end designation command is received in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not a promotion effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S604). . Here, the promotion effect in-progress flag is set to an on state by executing a process of step S612 described later, while being cleared to an off state by executing a process of step S616. Even when the process of step S602 is executed, the promotion effect flag may be cleared and turned off.

  If the flag for promotion effect is OFF in step S604 (step S604; No), for example, depending on whether or not the effect control process timer value matches a predetermined effect start determination value, etc. It is determined whether or not the execution timing has come (step S605). Here, in the big hit state of 2 rounds, since the execution period of each round is short, the effect control process timer value may be set so as not to reach the effect start determination value.

  When it is determined in step S605 that it is the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S605; Yes), the jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 33B is selected as the use table. Set (step S606). Subsequently, for example, numeric data indicating the promotion effect execution determination random value SR5 is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S607). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S607, by referring to the big hit middle promotion effect execution determination table 165B, the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability change” to “fourth probability change”. Depending on whether it is, it is determined whether there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect, and if there is a jackpot promotion promotion decision, whether to make a jackpot promotion promotion success effect or a jackpot promotion promotion failure, etc. A determination is made regarding the execution of the effect (step S608).

  When it is determined in step S605 that it is not the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S605; No), or when it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect in step S608 (step S609; Yes). ), A setting is made to execute an effect operation that is an effect during the big hit according to the number of rounds that is the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state (step S610). As an example, in the processing of step S610, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is specified from the big win opening open designation command for 15 rounds big hit, for sudden hit / small hit, or for sudden hit that is transmitted from the main board 11. . When the number of rounds is updated, the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated number of rounds is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 44, and the effect control process timer is set. Then, according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, supplying a display control command to the display control unit 123, transmitting a sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, By transmitting a signal to the lamp control board 14, an effect operation that is an effect during a big hit is executed. After executing the processing of step S610, the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  In the processing of step S610, when setting corresponding to the fact that the designation command for opening the big prize opening for accuracy / small hit is transmitted from the main board 11, it is executed immediately before the big hit gaming state is entered. Depending on the variation pattern type into which the variation pattern in the variable display of decorative symbols is classified, settings for executing different rendering operations may be performed. As an example, a variation pattern type common to the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”, such as the variation pattern types of special CA4-1, special CB4-1, and special CC4-1. When the decorative symbols are variably displayed by the variation pattern classified into the following, and the control is made to the big round state of 2 rounds, the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-2 and hit control CRE1-2 shown in FIG. The effect control patterns to be sequentially used are selected and read out, and the effect operation is set according to the effect control patterns. On the other hand, only when the big hit type such as special CA4-2, special CB4-2, special CC4-2, special CA4-3, special CB4-3, and special CC4-3 variation pattern type is “surprise”. When the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern classified into the dedicated variation pattern type and then controlled to the two round big hit gaming state, the winning start CST2-1 shown in FIG. -1 production control patterns are sequentially selected and read out as production control patterns to be used, and production operations are set according to those production control patterns.

  If it is determined in step S608 to execute the jackpot promotion effect (step S609; No), settings for starting the jackpot promotion effect are performed (step S611). As an example, in the process of step S611, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is specified from the big win opening open designation command for 15 round big hits transmitted from the main board 11. Then, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion effect corresponding to the specified number of rounds is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. At this time, for example, the value of the notification content buffer (notification content buffer value) provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is set according to which of the big success promotion effect and the big success failure promotion effect is executed. It may be. As a specific example, the notification content buffer value is set to “1” when executing the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, while the notification content buffer value is set to “0” when executing the jackpot promotion promotion effect. Set to. Then, after setting the promotion effect in-progress flag to the on state (step S612), the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S604 that the flag indicating that the promotion effect is on (step S604; Yes), for example, does the effect control process timer value match the effect end determination value indicated in the effect control pattern? Depending on whether or not, it is determined whether or not the end timing of promotion effect during jackpot is reached (step S613). At this time, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S613; No), settings are made to control the rendering operation that becomes the jackpot promotion effect (step S614). As an example, in the process of step S614, according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, the display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the sound effect signal is sent to the sound control board 13. It is only necessary to control the production operation that becomes the promotion effect during the big hit, for example, by transmitting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14. After executing the process of step S614, the big hit control effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S613 that it is the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S613; Yes), settings are made to end the jackpot promotion effect (step S615), and the flag for the promotion effect is cleared. Then, after the off state is set (step S616), the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect process executed in step S166 of FIG. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S631). Here, the ending effect in-progress flag is set to an on state by executing a process in step S638 described later, and is cleared to an off state by executing a process in step S641.

  When the ending effect flag is OFF in step S631 (step S631; No), for example, by reading the EXT data of the hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the big hit type is “normal”. It is determined whether or not it is a certain big hit (step S632). At this time, if it is not the normal big hit (step S632; No), it is determined whether or not the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S633). If the jackpot type is “third probability variation” (step S633; Yes), the promotion success effect has been executed from the notification content buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. It is determined whether or not (step S634). As an example, when the notification content buffer value is “1”, it is determined that the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed, and when the notification content buffer value is “0”, the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. What is necessary is just to determine that it is not.

  When it is determined in step S633 that the jackpot type is other than “third probability variation” (step S633; No), or when it is determined in step S634 that the promotion success effect has been executed (step S634). ; Yes), a setting for starting a production operation to be a predetermined non-promotion ending production is performed (step S635). As an example, in the process of step S635, by reading the EXT data of the hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11, either the 15 round big hit state or the sudden fake 15 round big hit state is completed. It is determined whether or not the round jackpot state ends. Then, in accordance with the determination result of the jackpot gaming state to be ended, an effect control pattern that does not execute the promotion effect is read from various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 44, and an effect control process timer is set.

  If it is determined in step S634 that the promotion success effect has not been executed (step S634; No), a setting is made to start the effect operation that becomes the ending promotion success effect (step S636). As an example, in the process of step S636, in response to the end of the 15th round big hit state, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion success effect is read from various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. .

  If it is determined in step S632 that it is a normal big hit (step S632; Yes), a setting is made to start an effect operation that becomes an ending promotion failure effect (step S637). As an example, in the process of step S637, in response to the end of the 15th round big hit state, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion failure effect is read from various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. .

  After executing any of the processes in steps S635 to S637, the ending effect flag is set to the on state (step S638), and the ending effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S631 that the ending effect flag is on (step S631; Yes), for example, the effect control process timer value matches the effect end determination value indicated in the effect control pattern. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect depending on whether or not (step S639). Here, the ending effect is an effect operation executed in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, including an unpromoted ending effect, an ending promotion success effect, and an ending promotion failure effect.

  If it is determined in step S639 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (step S639; No), settings for controlling the effect operation that becomes the ending effect are performed (step S640). As an example, in the process of step S640, the display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123 according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, and the sound effect signal is sent to the sound control board 13. It is only necessary to control the rendering operation as an ending effect by transmitting the illumination signal or transmitting the illumination signal to the lamp control board 14. After executing the process of step S640, the ending effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S639 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (step S639; Yes), for example, the ending effect flag is cleared and turned off, and the display control unit 123 Ending effects such as supplying a predetermined display control command, transmitting a predetermined sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, and transmitting a predetermined electrical signal to the lamp control board 14. Is set to end the process (step S641). At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variation start command reception waiting process (step S642), and then the ending effect process ends.

  Next, a specific example of the rendering operation by displaying various rendering images centering on the variable display of decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 will be described. The effect control board 12 responds to the reception of the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 11 based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, for example, The control CPU 120 supplies a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123 in step S519 shown in FIG. 62, for example, so that “left”, “middle”, “right” provided in the display area of the image display device 5 are used. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 69 and FIG. 70 are examples of display operations when the variable display result is “big hit”, a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, and a notice effect of “movable display device” is executed. Show. Here, for example, a display example when the variation pattern is Super PA 4-4 and the notice pattern is notice YP1-2 is shown. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern designation command or the like for designating the super PA 4-4, first, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols is displayed. As shown in FIG. 69 (B), the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are added to all the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”. To start fluctuation. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69C, the temporary stop symbols (“1”, “1”, “2”) determined in step S558 shown in FIG. 64 in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. ) Is displayed temporarily. Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo continuous change) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Thereafter, based on the notice effect control pattern CYP1-2 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2 determined in step S596 shown in FIG. 66, the movable display device 50 is normally set as shown in FIG. 69 (E). Move from position to overlap position. Then, the characters “chance” are displayed on the display screen 51. Thereafter, the movable display device 50 is returned to the normal position as shown in FIG. 69 (F), and temporary stop symbols (“1” are displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as shown in FIG. 69 (G). ”“ 1 ”“ 2 ”) are temporarily stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. Then, based on the notice effect control pattern CYP1-2, the movable display device 50 is moved from the normal position to the overlapping position as shown in FIG. Is displayed. Thereafter, the movable display device 50 is returned to the normal position as shown in FIG. 70 (B), and “7” is displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R as shown in FIG. 70 (C). ”Is stopped and displayed, and a reach state is established. Here, as shown in FIG. 70D, the movable display device 50 is moved again from the normal position to the overlapping position, and the character “super” is displayed on the display screen 51 to notify that the super reach is reached. In the display example of FIG. 70D, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are shifted upward. However, the movable display device 50 and the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are not shifted. You may make it overlap. Thereafter, a reach effect of super reach such as blinking the background as shown in FIG. 70 (E) is executed, and as shown in FIG. The decorative pattern indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed. After that, after notifying that it is a big hit, it becomes a big hit gaming state. As described above, the notice effect using the movable display device 50 can be executed in combination with the special effect of the “pseudo train”. In addition, as described above, depending on the notice pattern, the notice display effect can be executed by moving the movable display device 50 before and after the pseudo continuous change.

  71 shows a display operation example in the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B and a display operation example in the image display device 5 when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “fourth probability variation” or “surprise probability”. 4 is a timing chart for explaining an example of an opening / closing operation in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. FIGS. 72 to 75 show display operation examples when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “fourth probability variation” or “surprise probability”.

  At timing T = T10 shown in FIG. 71, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), "Left", "Medium", and "Right" decorative symbols corresponding to the start of variation of special symbols in a special game. The decorative display of the decorative patterns is started in all of the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Thereafter, at the timing T = T11 shown in FIG. 71, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. )

  When a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as when the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, for example, as shown in FIGS. 72 (C1) to (C3), “ After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, changing the decorative symbols again in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and then stopping and displaying them. The effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed so that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. In addition, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PA 4-4, for example, as shown in FIGS. 72 (D1) to (D5), After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, an effect display that causes the decorative symbols to change again (pseudo continuous variation) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is displayed. Done. Thereafter, the decorative symbols indicating the number “6” are aligned and stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. It reaches the reach state. Furthermore, when a specific effect of “Development Chance” is executed, for example, when the variation pattern is Super PC 4-1, for example, as shown in FIGS. 72 (E1) to (E6). In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol combination that will be the development chance HC6 is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and then the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped is rotated in the direction of reversing. After such an effect display is performed, the decorative display variable display state becomes the reach state.

  After reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 72 (C3) or 72 (D5) at the timing T = T12 shown in FIG. 71, for example, as shown in FIG. The variation speed of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5C decreases. For example, when the variation pattern is one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, “6” is displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C as shown in FIG. 73 (B). A “normal” reach effect that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) together with the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R having the numbers “left” and “right” is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 73 (B), the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result is “lost”. In such a case, by stopping the decorative symbols other than the number indicating “6” in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination are stopped and displayed. The variable display may be terminated. That is, when the variation pattern is any one of normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-8 that executes a “normal” reach effect, the effect images shown in FIGS. 72 and 73A are displayed. Thereafter, when the variable display result is one of the normal PA 2-5 to the normal PA 2-8 in which “big hit” is obtained, for example, the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. When the variable display result is any one of the normal PA 2-1 to normal PA 2-4 in which “losing” is indicated, the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination are stopped and displayed. When any one of the reach effect α1 to the reach effect α3 or the reach effect β1 to the reach effect β3 is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. The fluctuating speed of the decorative pattern at is increased again, and various reach effects are displayed. For example, in the reach effect β1, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 73 (D) is displayed. Specifically, any of Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-6, Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-5, Super PC4-1, Super PD1-1, and Super PD1-2 in which the fluctuation pattern executes the reach effect β1. 72, 73 (A), (C), and (I), after the effect images shown in FIGS. 72, 73A and 73I are displayed, the super PB4-1 to the super PB4-1 that the variable display result is “big hit” When it is any of PB4-5, Super PC4-1, Super PD1-1, Super PD1-2, etc., the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, and the variable display result becomes “lost”. When it is one of the super PB 3-1 to the super PB 3-6, for example, the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination are stopped and displayed. If the reach effect α1 is one of the reach effects α3, the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 73 (E) is displayed, and then the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 73 (F) proceeds. To do. In the reach effect α1, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), a decorative design that is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 73 (G), the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result is “lost”. In such a case, the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed, and the variable display of decorative symbols may be terminated. That is, when the variation pattern is any one of super PA3-1 to super PA3-5 and super PA4-1 to super PA4-5 executing the reach effect α1, FIG. 72, FIG. 73 (A), ( After the effect images shown in C), (E), and (F) are displayed, when the variable display result is any one of Super PA4-1 to Super PA4-5 that is “big hit”, etc. As shown in FIG. 73 (G), when the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is one of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-5 that is “lost”, etc. The effect image shown in 73 (H) is displayed, and the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (H) and (I), the process proceeds to the second stage effect display. On the other hand, in reach effect β2 and reach effect β3, after a character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 73 (J) is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds. Specifically, when the variation pattern is any one of super PB5-1 to super PB5-5, super PC4-2, super PE1-1, and super PE1-2 executing the reach effect β2, or the reach effect B3. When the super PF 1-1 is executed, for example, the decorative design indicating the numeral “6” in the effect images shown in FIGS. 72, 73 (A), (C), and (J) is, for example, “ After the effect image having the decorative pattern indicating the number “7” is displayed, the effect image of the probability variation jackpot decision is displayed, and the confirmed ornament symbols constituting the probability variation jackpot combination are stopped and displayed.

  When the second stage effect display progresses as shown in FIG. 73 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, for example, as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern to be displayed appears. If the variable display result is “losing”, for example, as shown in FIG. 74B, the displayed decorative symbols are not changed, and the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination are stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to finish the variable display of a decoration design. That is, when the variation pattern is any one of Super PA 3-6 to Super PA 3-10 and Super PA 4-6 to Super PA 4-10 for executing the reach effect α2, FIG. 72, FIG. 73 (A), ( After the effect images shown in C), (E), (F), (H), and (I) are displayed, any one of Super PA4-6 to Super PA4-10 whose variable display result is “big hit” In some cases, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, and any one of Super PA 3-6 to Super PA 3-10 in which the variable display result is “losing”. In some cases, the effect image shown in FIG. 74 (B) is displayed, and the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 74B to 74D, the process proceeds to a third stage effect display (also referred to as “relief effect”). Then, a decorative pattern that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage of effect display appears. Specifically, when the variation pattern is any one of the super PA 5-1 to the super PA 5-5 that executes the reach effect α3, FIG. 72, FIG. 73 (A), (C), (E), (F), (H), (I), the decorative design showing the number “6” in the effect images shown in FIGS. 74 (B) and 74 (C), for example, the decorative design showing the number “7”. After the produced effect image is displayed, the effect image for determining the probability variation jackpot is displayed, and the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (D). Here, for example, when it is decided not to execute the changing promotion effect in step S574 shown in FIG. 65, the temporarily stopped display decoration pattern is used as it is as the final stop design as shown in FIG. 74 (E). Stopped display (final stop display) as a confirmed decorative pattern. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the changing promotion effect, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 74 (F), FIG. 74 (G) As shown in Fig. 5, the same pattern is changed again in the state where the same decorative symbols are aligned in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, in the case where the fluctuating promotion effect is executed in response to the big hit type being “first probability change”, for example, as shown in FIG. After that, the promotion success effect during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the probability variation big hit combination. Note that when the promotion promotion effect during change is executed, after performing the change again of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 74 (G), for example, as in FIG. What is necessary is just to stop-display a decorative design.

  And, the figure at the timing almost the same as the timing at which the confirmed decorative symbol that is the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed (strictly speaking, after the stop display time of the confirmed decorative symbol has elapsed from the timing at which the confirmed decorative symbol that is the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed) At timing T = T13 shown in FIG. 71, for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), a big hit start effect display is executed in which a notification image indicating that the variable display result is a big hit is displayed in the center of the display area. . Thereafter, at timing T = T14 shown in FIG. 71, on the main board 11 side, in step S319, for example, a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined prize winning door solenoid is started to be output via a predetermined solenoid circuit. As a result, a setting is made to turn on the solenoid for the big prize opening door for opening the big prize opening. At this time, on the side of the effect control board 12, for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), a notification image indicating the number of rounds such as “Round 1” is displayed on the upper left of the display area, and an effect image in the big hit gaming state The effect display during the big hit is displayed. The display during the big hit effect may be different for each round, or may be performed as a series of effects from the first round to the fifteenth round. In the latter case, in the process of step S610, it is only necessary to perform a series of big hit effect display prepared in advance regardless of the number of rounds.

  FIG. 76 shows a display operation example in the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, a display operation example in the image display device 5, and a special variable winning ball device 7 when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the example of an opening-and-closing operation | movement in. FIG. 77 shows a display operation example when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”.

  At timing T = T20 shown in FIG. 76, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), for example, the decorative symbols “left”, “middle”, and “right” corresponding to the start of variation of special symbols in the special symbol game. The decorative display of the decorative patterns is started in all of the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, when the variation pattern is the special PG 3-1, at timings T = T 21 to T 23 shown in FIG. 76, for example, as shown in FIGS. 77 (B) to (D), “left” → “right” → In a predetermined order such as “medium”, decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “5”, and “3” are sequentially stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and then the timing T = T23 to T24 shown in FIG. Then, for example, a stunning effect display for displaying a stunning image for notifying that “surprise” is obtained as shown in FIG. 77 (E) is started. When the variation pattern is the special PG 1-1, the stunning effect display is started after the decorative design that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without executing the specific effect. When the variation pattern is the special PG1-2, the specific effect of “slip” is executed, and after the decorative symbols that are non-reach combinations are stopped and displayed, the sudden effect display is started. When the variation pattern is any one of special PG1-3 to special PG1-5, a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, and a decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and then a stunning effect display is started. . When the variation pattern is special PG1-6, the specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” is executed, and after the combination of decorative symbols that become one of the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8 is stopped, the stunning effect display is started. The When the variation pattern is the special PG 2-1, the “normal” reach effect is executed without executing the specific effect, and after the decorative symbols to be the reach lose combination are stopped and displayed, the sudden effect display is started. When the variation pattern is the special PG 2-2, the “slip” specific effect and the “normal” reach effect are executed, and after the decorative symbols that are the reach-losing combination are stopped and displayed, the sudden effect display is started. When the variation pattern is the special PG3-2, the “normal” reach effect is executed without executing the specific effect, and after passing through the roulette chance effect, the decorative pattern that becomes the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed. The sudden effect display is started. When the variation pattern is special PG3-3, the specific effect of “slip” and the reach effect of “normal” are executed, and after passing through the roulette chance effect, the decorative pattern that becomes the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed. Production display is started. Thereafter, at a timing T = T24 shown in FIG. 76, a confirmed decorative pattern that is a combination of a fixed decorative pattern that is a combination of a non-reach loss and a fixed decorative pattern that is a combination of a non-reach loss and a fixed decorative pattern that is a combination of a non-reach loss is determined. Either one (in this example, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the chance of chance TC1) is stopped (final stop display). At this time, the sudden effect display is continuously executed according to the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-1 and the hit control CRE1-1.

  Thereafter, at timing T = T25 shown in FIG. 76, on the main board 11 side, in step S319, for example, a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined prize winning door solenoid is started to output via a predetermined solenoid circuit. For example, the setting for turning on the solenoid for the big prize opening door for opening the big prize opening is performed. Then, at timing T = T26 shown in FIG. 76 after 0.5 seconds, on the main board 11 side, in step S351, for example, a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined big prize opening door solenoid is transmitted via a predetermined solenoid circuit. A setting is made to turn off the solenoid for the big prize opening door for closing the big prize opening, for example, by stopping the output. At this time, on the side of the effect control board 12, according to the effect control pattern of CRE1-1 during hit control, a special effect mode such as the LIVE mode as shown in FIG. The probability change entry display for displaying the effect image for informing the transition to is started. In this way, in the period of timing T = T23 to T27 shown in FIG. 76, the sudden effect display is executed as a series of effects.

  Then, in accordance with CED 2-1 during hit control, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 77 (G) is displayed as part of the probability change entry display as an ending effect in response to the end of the two round big hit state. About the display which can recognize that there exists, as shown in FIG.77 (H), for example, it is made to display even after the next decoration design change is started.

  FIG. 78 shows an example of display operation in the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B when the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, and the release control pattern is open KP2, image display device 5 is a timing chart for explaining a display operation example in FIG. 5 and an opening / closing operation example in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. FIG. 80 shows a display operation example when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”.

  At timing T = T30 shown in FIG. 78, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), for example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative symbols corresponding to, for example, the start of special symbol variation in a special game. The decorative display of the decorative patterns is started in all of the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, when the variation pattern is the special PH 3-1, at timings T = T 31 to T 33 shown in FIG. 78, for example, as shown in FIGS. 80 (B) to (D), “left” → “right” → In a predetermined order such as “medium”, decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “5”, and “3” are sequentially stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and then the timing T = T33 to T34 shown in FIG. Then, for example, a surprise effect display for displaying an effect image for notifying that the “accuracy” is as shown in FIG. 80 (E) is started. When the variation pattern is any one of special PH1-3 to special PH1-5, a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, and a decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Is done. When the variation pattern is the special PH 3-2, the “normal” reach effect is executed without executing the specific effect, and after passing through the roulette chance effect, the decorative pattern that becomes the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed. The sudden effect display is started. When the fluctuation pattern is special PH3-3, the specific effect of “slip” and the reach effect of “normal” are executed, and after passing through the roulette chance effect, the decorative pattern that becomes the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed. Production display is started. Thereafter, at the timing T = T34 shown in FIG. 78, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the chance of chance TC1 is stopped and displayed (final stop display). At this time, the sudden effect display is continuously executed according to the effect control pattern of the hit start CST1-3 and the hit control CRE1-1.

  Thereafter, at timing T = T35 shown in FIG. 78, on the side of the main board 11, in step S319, for example, a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined prize winning door solenoid is started to be output via a predetermined solenoid circuit. For example, the setting for turning on the solenoid for the big prize opening door for opening the big prize opening is performed. Then, at timing T = T36 shown in FIG. 78 after 0.5 seconds, on the main board 11 side, in step S341, for example, a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined big prize opening door solenoid is transmitted via a predetermined solenoid circuit. A setting is made to turn off the solenoid for the big prize opening door for closing the big prize opening, for example, by stopping the output. Further, at the timing T = T37 shown in FIG. 78, on the main board 11 side, a setting is made to turn on a large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening. Then, at timing T = T38 shown in FIG. 78 after 0.5 seconds, the main board 11 is set to turn off the large winning opening door solenoid for closing the large winning opening. Then, until the timing T = T39 shown in FIG. 78, the winning slot for the holding time of 1.0 second is closed. In this way, during the period of timing T = T33 to T39 shown in FIG. 78, as in the case where the big hit type is “probable”, the promising effect display is executed as a series of effects. In particular, the opening pattern (third opening pattern) of the big prize opening during the period of timing T = T33 to T38 shown in FIG. 78 is the opening pattern (fourth opening) when the big hit type is “surprise” shown in FIG. Pattern).

  At the timing T = T39 shown in FIG. 78 after 1.0 seconds from the closing of the big prize opening, on the main board 11 side, in step S343, for example, a predetermined big prize is given via a predetermined solenoid circuit. For example, when a solenoid drive signal for the door door solenoid is started to be output, a setting is made to turn on the large winning door door solenoid for opening the large winning port. At this time, on the side of the effect control board 12, according to the effect control pattern of CRE1-1 during hit control, for example, as shown in FIG. A big hit start effect display displayed in the center is executed. At the timing T = T40 shown in FIG. 78 after the end of the big hit start effect display, on the side of the effect control board 12, as in the case where the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. For example, as shown in FIG. 80 (G), a notification image indicating the number of rounds, such as “Round 1”, is displayed on the upper left of the display area, and an effect display during the big hit that displays the effect image in the big hit gaming state is executed. The

  At the timing T = T41 shown in FIG. 78 when 27.5 seconds have elapsed after the grand prize opening is opened or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated, the main substrate 11 side performs step S351. For example, when a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined big prize opening door solenoid is stopped via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the big winning opening door solenoid for closing the big winning opening is turned off. Set the status.

  Thereafter, in the period after timing T = T42 shown in FIG. 78, as in the case where the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” 29 The number of rounds that open the grand prize opening is reduced by one less than the first number (for example, “14”) until 5 seconds elapse or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated. The

  FIG. 79A shows an example of display operation in the image display device 5 when the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, and the release control pattern is release KP3, and a special variable prize. 5 is a timing chart for explaining an example of an opening / closing operation in the ball device 7. Up to timing T = T38 shown in FIG. 79A is the same as the case where the opening control pattern shown in FIG. 78 is KP2. When the opening / closing control pattern is KP3, the prize winning opening for 2.0 seconds is closed until the timing T = T50 shown in FIG. 79 after the big winning opening is closed at timing T = T38. It becomes. Thereafter, the big prize opening is opened for 26.5 seconds from the timing T = T50. The opening and closing operations after the second round are the same as when the opening control pattern is KP2. Thus, in the opening KP2 and the opening KP3, the winning opening is set to the fourth time (in this case, 27.5 seconds) from the end of the third opening pattern in which the opening of the winning opening is controlled for the third time (0.5 seconds). Or 26.5 seconds) The time (holding time) for closing the big winning opening until the start of the fourth opening pattern to be controlled is different (1.0 seconds and 2.0 seconds).

  FIG. 79B shows an example of display operation in the image display device 5 when the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, and the release control pattern is release KP5, and a special variable prize. 5 is a timing chart for explaining an example of an opening / closing operation in the ball device 7. The example shown in FIG. 79B is different from the example of the opening KP2 shown in FIG. 78 in that the first opening time in the third opening pattern is 1.0 second. Accordingly, the release control for the fourth time in the first round is 27.0 seconds.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the notice effect by the movable display device 50 can be executed in accordance with the pseudo-continuous variation in the specific effect of the “pseudo train”, so that the interest of the notice effect is improved.

  In addition, as described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, the notice effect may be executed before the pseudo continuous change (FIG. 69 (E)) and after the pseudo continuous change (FIGS. 70 (A) and (D)). This will improve the interest of the notice effect.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the movable display device 50 is operated by a single drive source (motor 70), and the display member 52 is composed of a first arm 82, a second arm 83, and a support member 53. Therefore, stable operation can be realized.

  In addition, since the connector 56 for connecting the wiring 96 is on the opposite side of the transmission member 80 and the first and second arms 82 and 83 across the display screen 51, the wiring is cut when the movable display device 50 is operated. Can be solved.

  Further, when the movable display device 50 operates, the wiring 96 connected to the display screen 51 (display member 52) also moves together, and other parts must be installed so that the wiring is not cut. By fixing the wiring 96 to the pedestal 90 by the wiring fixing unit 95, the movement range of the wiring 96 is minimized, so that the degree of freedom of component installation is improved.

  Moreover, since the display screen 51 is raised from below the image display device 50 to execute the notice effect, the interest of the notice effect is improved.

  Further, since the movable display device 50 is provided below the stage 60, the empty space below the stage 60 can be used effectively.

  Further, the third opening pattern of the opening KP2 and the opening KP3 (the opening pattern from the timing T = T35 to T38 in FIGS. 78 and 79A) shown in FIGS. 78 and 79A is shown in FIG. Further, it was the same as the opening pattern (second opening pattern) in the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” (or “sudden shortening” in FIG. 85 described later). On the other hand, the third opening pattern of the opening KP5 shown in FIG. 79 (B) is similar to the second opening pattern but different. In this way, when the “fourth probability change” (probability struck big hit) is made, it is possible to execute a release control similar to the case of “probability” but different, for example, a skilled player can By paying attention to the opening pattern of the winning opening, it is possible to recognize that the opening pattern is different from “surprise” before the big hit effect display is displayed, and the fun of the game can be further improved.

  Further, in the opening KP2 and the opening KP3, the third opening pattern is the same as the second opening pattern, but the special winning opening from the end of the third opening pattern to the start of the fourth opening pattern is closed. Since the time (holding time) is different (1.0 second and 2.0 seconds), it is possible to improve the fun of the game when it becomes the “fourth probability change”.

  In this embodiment, for example, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes of steps S239 and S246 shown in FIG. 49, and whether or not the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result matches the jackpot determination value data. Thus, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is controlled as the big hit game state with “big hit” before the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In the process of step S249, the jackpot type is set to “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”, “fourth probability variation” based on the decision to control to the big hit gaming state. ”Or“ Accuracy ”. Subsequently, in the process of step S273 shown in FIG. 50, a plurality of decorative pattern variation pattern types are determined based on the determination result of whether to control the big hit gaming state, the determination result of whether to reach the reach state, or the like. Decide on one of the types. Subsequently, in the process of step S276, based on the determination result in step S273, the decorative pattern variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types.

  Here, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M shown in FIGS. 14 (A) to (G) and FIGS. 15 (A) to (E), the big hit types are “normal”, “first probability change”, “ Whether the decision was made to be either “second probability variation” or “third probability variation” or “fourth probability variation” or “surprising”, and the total number of pending storages is a predetermined number (for example, “5 The table data is configured so that different variation pattern types can be determined depending on whether the number is less than or equal to a predetermined number or more. In addition, the setting of the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D shown in FIGS. 20, 21A, 21B, and 22 differs depending on the determination result as to which of the plurality of types of variation pattern types. The table data is configured so that the variation pattern can be determined. Then, any one of the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D shown in FIG. 20, FIG. 21 (A) and FIG. 22 and set in step S274 shown in FIG. 50 is referred to in step S276. The variation patterns determined by the above include super PA4-4, super PA4-5, super PA4-9, super PA4-10, super PA5-4, super PA5-5, super PB4-4, super PB4-5, Fluctuations that execute “pseudo-continuous” specific effects, such as fluctuation patterns of Super PB5-4, Super PB5-5, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-3 to Special PG1-5, Special PH1-3 to Special PH1-5 Pattern is included.

  Referring to the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M and the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D configured as described above, after determining the variation pattern type in the process of step S273 shown in FIG. By determining the variation pattern in the process of S276, whether the big hit type has been decided to be any one of “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”, or “fourth probability variation” ”Or“ Accuracy ”, and“ Pseudo-continuous ”at different ratios depending on whether the total number of reserved memories is less than a predetermined number (for example,“ 5 ”) or more than a predetermined number. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the specific effect of "", the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation, and the like. Further, in the setting of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137C shown in FIG. 21B and the setting of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137D shown in FIG. The range of the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern assigned in this way is the same. For this reason, for example, the player is a big hit because of the difference in the variation mode such as whether the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation in the specific effect of the “pseudo train” is 0, 2 or 3 times. It becomes difficult to predict whether the type is “probability” or “fourth probability change”. As a result, the player predicts in advance from the number of executions of the specific performance of the “pseudo-ream”, whether it will be a 15-round big hit state, a 2-round big hit state, or a stubborn 15-round big hit state. On the other hand, since it becomes difficult to predict in advance whether it will be a two-round big hit game or a 15-round big hit state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the variable display of decorative symbols.

  Also, the decision to decide whether the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “third probability variation” or “fourth probability variation” or “surprise probability” Whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed depends on whether the total number of reserved memories is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”) or more than a predetermined number. Since the determination ratio such as the number of executions of the re-variable display operation is different, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

  On the other hand, on the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 shown in FIG. 61 in response to the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11. Thus, after determining the specific effect pattern, the decorative design that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect, and the notice pattern, the effect control pattern corresponding to these determination results is determined. At this time, if the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is a variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the temporary stop display is performed in step S558 shown in FIG. The temporary stop symbol to be determined is determined.

  Here, the temporary stop symbol determination that is referred to when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “third probability variation”. In the table 167B and the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167C and 167D that are referred to when the big hit type is either “fourth probability variation” or “sudden probability”, the pseudo consecutive chance items GC1 to GC8 are assigned. The range of the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is different. Further, when the variation pattern is special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PH1-3, or special PH1-4, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is referred to by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. If the variation pattern is special PG1-5 or special PH1-5, it is determined as one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D. When the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” or “sudden probability”, it is determined which of the pseudo consecutive chance items GC1 to GC8 is the same rate. As a result, the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “third probability variation”, or the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” or “surprise probability”. It is possible to determine which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is made at a different ratio depending on whether or not there is. For this reason, from the decorative symbols constituting any of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It will be easier for a player to predict in advance whether it will be a 15-round jackpot, a 2-round jackpot game, or a stunning 15-round jackpot, but it will be a 2-round jackpot game or a 15-round jackpot. Since it becomes difficult to predict in advance, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the variable display of decorative symbols.

  Furthermore, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C that is referred to when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” and the total reserved memory number is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”), and the total reserved memory number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. Even in the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D referred to in a certain case, the range of the random value SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol assigned to each of the pseudo consecutive chance points GC1 to GC8 is different. Yes. As a result, it is possible to determine which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is made at a different ratio depending on whether the total number of reserved memories is less than the predetermined number or the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game during the variable display of decorative symbols.

  Also, in the process of step S593 shown in FIG. 66, it is determined based on the variation pattern or the like that there is no notice or one of the notice pattern types of notice CY1 to notice CY3. Subsequently, in the process of step S596, the notice pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of step S593.

  Here, in the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 39, whether the jackpot type is a variation pattern designating any one of “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, and “third probability variation”. Whether it is a variation pattern designating either “fourth probability variation” or “surprise accuracy”, or a variation pattern corresponding to the total number of reserved memories being less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”) or total pending memory The table data is configured so that different notice pattern types can be determined depending on whether the number is a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the number is a predetermined number or more. Further, in the setting of the hit notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIG. 40 to FIG. 42, the result of determining whether the notice pattern type is a plurality of kinds, the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability change”, Whether the variation pattern specifies either “second probability variation” or “third probability variation” or “fourth probability variation” or “surprising probability”, and the total number of reserved memories is predetermined. Different notice patterns can be determined depending on whether the pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the number is less than the number (for example, “5”) or a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Thus, the table data is configured.

  Here, in the setting of the hit notice pattern determination table 171A shown in FIG. 40, the variation pattern is special PG3-1 to special PG3-3, and the variation pattern is special PH3-1 to special PH3-3. Then, the ratio determined without notice and the ratio decided for the notice pattern of notice YP1-1 are the same. When the variation pattern is special PG1-3, special PG1-4, and when the variation pattern is special PH1-3, special PH1-4, the ratio determined without notice and the notice pattern of notice YP1-1 The ratio determined to be the same. In the case where the variation pattern is the special PG 1-5 and the case where the variation pattern is the special PH 1-5, the ratio determined without notice is the same as the ratio determined as the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1. ing. In the setting of the notice pattern determination table 171B shown in FIG. 41, when the variation pattern is special PG3-1 to special PG3-3 and when the variation pattern is special PH3-1 to special PH3-3, The ratio determined without notice is the same as the ratio determined for the notice pattern of notice YP2-1. When the variation pattern is special PG1-3, special PG1-4, and when the variation pattern is special PH1-3, special PH1-4, the ratio determined without notice and the notice pattern of notice YP2-1 The ratio determined to be the same. In the case where the variation pattern is the special PG 1-5 and the case where the variation pattern is the special PH 1-5, the ratio determined without the notice and the ratio decided as the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1 are the same. ing. Furthermore, in the setting of the hit notice pattern determination table 171C shown in FIG. 42, when the variation pattern is special PG3-1 to special PG3-3 and when the variation pattern is special PH3-1 to special PH3-3. The ratio determined without notice is the same as the ratio determined for the notice pattern of notice YP3-1. When the variation pattern is special PG1-3, special PG1-4, and when the variation pattern is special PH1-3, special PH1-4, the ratio determined without notice and the notice pattern of notice YP3-1 The ratio determined for the notice pattern of notice YP3-2 is the same. When the variation pattern is special PG1-5 and when the variation pattern is special PH1-5, the proportion determined without notice, the proportion decided as the notice pattern of notice YP3-1, and notice YP3-2 The ratio determined for the notice pattern is the same. With this setting, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the big hit type is “surprise”, and the variable display result is “small hit”. Thus, it is possible to make the ratio for executing the notice effect and the ratio for determining the notice pattern as a plurality of types the same.

  With reference to the notice type determination table 170 configured as described above, after determining the notice pattern type in the process of step S593 shown in FIG. 66, the notice pattern is determined in the process of step S596, so that the big hit type Is a variation pattern that specifies one of “normal”, “first variation”, “second variation”, or “third variation”, or a variation pattern that designates either “fourth variation” or “surprise variation” It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect, the notice pattern, etc. at different ratios depending on whether or not. This makes it easier for the player to predict in advance whether it will be a 15-round big hit state, a 2-round big hit game, or a promising fake 15-round big hit state from the effect display mode in the notice effect, Since it becomes difficult to predict in advance whether it will be a two-round big hit game or a 15-round big hit state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during variable display of decorative symbols.

  As an example, when the notice pattern type is determined to be notice CY2 in the process of step S593 shown in FIG. 66, in the process of step S596, the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability change”, “second probability change”, Depending on whether it is a variation pattern designating either “third probability variation”, “fourth probability variation”, or “surprising accuracy”, the notice pattern is indicated in advance notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-1. By determining one of YP2-4, it is possible to determine the number of switching of the effect image in the notice effect of the “step-up image”. As a result, based on the number of times the effect image is switched in the notice effect of the “step-up image”, the player can determine whether the player is in the 15 round big hit state, the 2 round big hit game, or the probable fake 15 round big hit state. Although it is easier to predict in advance, it is difficult to predict in advance whether the game will be a two-round big hit game or a 15-round big hit state, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the variable display of decorative symbols.

  The big hit type is “Normal”, “First Probability”, “Second Probability”, or “Third Probability”. Not only whether it is a specified variation pattern, but also corresponds to a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the total number of reserved memories is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”) or a case where the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Depending on whether or not the pattern is a variation pattern, the determination ratio of the effect display mode in the notice effect such as whether or not to execute the notice effect and the number of times the effect image is switched in the notice effect of the “step-up image” varies. Further, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 executes the decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 and the decorative symbol variable process in step S162 shown in FIG. 61 according to the variation start command, the variable display result notification command, and the like. Corresponding to the determination result in step S276, control for executing various rendering operations during variable display of decorative symbols is performed. Then, in response to receiving the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the effect control CPU 120 executes the big hit control effect process in step S164 shown in FIG. 61, thereby determining in step S249. Corresponding to the results, control for executing various performance operations in the big hit gaming state is performed.

  As an example, when the variable display result designated by the variable display result notification command is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the steps shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation process of S162, the decorative symbol variation display, the effect operation in the reach effect, and the like are executed according to the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S276. Further, in the effect processing during the big hit control in step S164 shown in FIG. 61, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or the like. In accordance with the effect control pattern corresponding to, the effect operation in the big hit start effect shown in FIG. 75A and the effect operation in the big hit effect shown in FIG. 75B are executed.

  As another example, when the variable display result specified by the variable display result notification command is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, in the decorative symbol changing process of step S162 shown in FIG. 61, in step S276. In accordance with the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the determined variation pattern or the like, an effect operation in a decorative symbol variation display or a stunning effect shown in FIG. 77 (E) is executed. Further, in the big hit control effect processing in step S164 shown in FIG. 61, the hit start CST2-1 and the hit control CRE1-1 corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In accordance with the effect control pattern, the continuation of the effect operation in the accompaniment effect shown in FIG. 77 (E) is executed, so that the effect operation in the series of accompaniment effects is executed during the decorative symbol variation display and over the two round big hit state. After that, the probability variation entry display shown in FIG. 77 (F) is executed.

  As yet another example, when the variable display result specified by the variable display result notification command is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability change”, in the decorative symbol variation processing of step S162 shown in FIG. In accordance with the symbol variation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determined in S276, the rendering operation in the surprise effect shown in FIG. 80 (E) is the same as when the decorative symbol variation display and the jackpot type is “surprise”. Is executed. Further, in the big hit control effect processing in step S164 shown in FIG. 61, the hit start CST1-3 and the hit control CRE1 corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability change”. In accordance with the production control pattern of -1, the continuation of the production operation in the accompaniment production shown in FIG. In the same way as when the jackpot type is “accuracy”, the rendering operation in a series of accuracies effects is executed over a certain round being executed. Thereafter, according to the effect control pattern of CRE 1-1 during the hit control, the big hit shown in FIG. 80 (F) is performed in the same manner as when the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. The production operation in the production at the start is executed.

  As described above, when the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” in step S249 shown in FIG. 49, the big hit type is determined to be “surprise”. Depending on the time, the effect operation during the variable display of the decorative symbols and in the big hit game state is different, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Further, when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability change” in step S249, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the second position in the same way as when the big hit type is determined to be “probable”. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is controlled to be changed to the first state advantageous to the player by opening the grand prize opening in a predetermined period of 3 hours (for example, 0.5 seconds), The production operation in the stunning production is executed. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether the jackpot gaming state is a two-round jackpot or a fifteen round jackpot, and is more surprising in the variable display of decorative symbols and in the jackpot gaming state. Production can be performed.

  49, when the big hit type is determined as one of “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation” or “probability” in step S249 shown in FIG. 49, control to the probability variation state is performed in step S375 shown in FIG. When the setting for starting the game is performed, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state. As a result, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise”, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is controlled to be a probable change state, thereby ensuring the interest of the player. Even when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability change”, the game state after the end of the big hit gaming state is surely changed to the player by executing the effect operation in the surprise effect shown in FIG. However, it is possible to prevent a player's interest from deteriorating, since the situation that the control is not controlled to the probability variation state does not occur.

  In the process of step S268 shown in FIG. 50, the decorative symbol variable display is performed based on the determination that the big hit flag is off in step S261 in response to the determination result that the game is not controlled to the big hit gaming state. It is determined whether or not the state is a reach state. Here, in response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S268 shown in FIG. 50, a step is performed using one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C set in step S270. By executing the process of S273, it is determined as one of a plurality of variation pattern types such as normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2 according to the reach state. To do. Further, in response to the determination that the reach state is not set in step S268, the process of step S273 is performed using any of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C set in step S271. By executing, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns including non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2 that execute a specific effect during variable display of decorative symbols.

  In addition, in response to the determination to reach the reach state in step S268 shown in FIG. 50, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S273, the loss variation pattern determination table 138B is used to perform step S276. By executing the process, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to “reach” is determined. Further, it is determined in step S268 shown in FIG. 50 that the reach state is not set, and the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type for executing the specific effect in step S273. In response to the determination, by executing the process of step S276 using the loss variation pattern determination table 138A, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7 prepared in advance to execute a specific effect. Is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  In this way, even when the decorative display variable display state does not reach the reach state, for example, it is possible to execute specific effects such as “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, “intro”, and “end of development opportunity”, thereby enabling various effects This can improve the game entertainment. Further, in the processing of step S273 and step S276, depending on whether or not it is determined in step S268 that the reach state is set, the variation pattern type and the variation pattern are determined using different determination tables, and the reach state is determined. The determination process does not compete between the case where it is set and the case where the reach state is not set. Therefore, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type used for determining the variation pattern type can be made common numerical data regardless of the determination result whether or not to reach the reach state, Furthermore, the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern used for determining the variation pattern can be the common numerical data regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state. As a result, the amount of processing in the process executed to update the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 and the random number value MR4 (for example, the main random number value update process in step S14 shown in FIG. 46) is reduced, and the program The amount can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to simplify the configuration by preventing the configuration of the random number circuit 104 from becoming complicated and increasing the storage area of the random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 and the like. . Here, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, regardless of the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach state in step S268, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by the common processing module. In the processes of steps S275 and S276, regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by the common processing module. Thereby, the amount of programs can be reduced as compared with the case where determination is performed using different processing modules according to the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state.

  In the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. 19A, the non-reach CA1-4 that executes a specific effect when the total number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, compared to when it is less than the predetermined number. The table data is configured such that the ratio determined for the variation pattern type is low. As a result, when the number of reserved data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the average variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened, It is possible to reduce winnings in which the start condition is not satisfied.

  In the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 18A to 18C, depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the classified variation pattern types. As a result, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation different from the design, and various production operations can be executed at a predetermined rate close to the design. Can be improved.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M shown in FIGS. 14 (A) to 14 (G) and FIGS. 15 (A) to 15 (E), according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of the big hit types, The table data is configured so that different variation pattern types can be determined. This makes it possible to perform different types of performance operations according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M shown in FIGS. 14A to 14G and FIGS. 15A to 15E, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state. The table data is configured so that different variation pattern types can be determined depending on whether or not the state is a certain variation state. Thereby, according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, different types of effect operations can be executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the first special symbol display device 4, a plurality of game balls are awarded based on the fact that the first start condition is established after the game ball has won the first start prize opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first start condition is established. A special game that variably displays a special symbol to be the first special graphic of the type is executed. In the second special symbol display device 4B, based on the fact that the second starting condition is satisfied after the game ball has won the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting condition is satisfied, A special figure game is executed which variably displays special symbols as a plurality of types of second special figures. In the display area of the image display device 5, for example, in the special game using the first special figure and the second special figure in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Corresponding to the variable display, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are variably displayed. Further, the CPU 103 included in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 follows a program read from the ROM 101, for example, a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. A process for controlling the progress is executed. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 follows the program read from the ROM 121, for example, in the command analysis process of step S405 shown in FIG. 58 or the effect control process process of step S406, etc. The process for controlling the display state of is executed. Then, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first starting condition is determined, or the second starting condition is established. Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special figure game using the second special diagram based on the determination is determined, the numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used. The variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types.

  Thus, after the variation pattern type is determined using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the determination result. By doing so, various rendering operations can be executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state. On the other hand, even when a special symbol is variably displayed by a plurality of display devices such as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the variable display, the variation is changed. Numerical data indicating a common random value MR3 is used for pattern type determination. This reduces the amount of processing in the processing (for example, the main-side random value updating processing in step S14 shown in FIG. 46) executed to update the numerical data indicating the random value MR3, thereby reducing the program amount. Can be planned.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs the first hold display increase update setting in step S154 shown in FIG. 59, and performs the second hold display increase update setting in step S155, whereby the hold memory count notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is set. If one of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command, which is the starting opening winning designation command, has been normally received when the is received, for example, as shown in FIG. In the start winning memory display area 5H, the first reserved memory number, which is the number of stored data in the first special figure storage unit 151A based on the establishment of the first start condition, and the second one based on the establishment of the second start condition. The second reserved memory number that is the number of stored hold data in the 2 special figure hold storage unit 151B can be displayed in an identifiable manner. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain the progress of a game correctly.

  Further, the CPU 103 causes the first start winning prize designation command to be transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S206 shown in FIG. 48, and then causes the pending storage number notification command to be transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S209. In addition, after the second start winning port designation command is transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S215, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S218. Here, in the case where it is possible to specify which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied by one production control command together with the total number of stored data that is the total number of stored data, for example, the total reservation When the upper limit value of the stored number is “8”, it is necessary to prepare a total of 16 types of effect control commands of 8 types corresponding to the case where the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. . On the other hand, if an effect control command that can specify which of the first start condition and the second start condition is established and an effect control command that can specify the total number of reserved memories are prepared separately, the first It is only necessary to prepare a total of 10 types of effect control commands, that is, two types of effect control commands that can specify each of the start condition and the second start condition, and eight types of effect control commands that allow the total reserved memory number to be specified. The types of commands prepared in advance and the storage capacity of the command table can be reduced.

  The production control CPU 120 performs display update setting when no start opening winning designation is made in step S156 shown in FIG. 59, so that when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the starting opening winning designation is performed. Based on the determination that neither the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command as the command has been received, the display mode of the hold storage display in the start prize storage display area 5H is predetermined. The display mode is changed to a gray display as shown in FIG. 60B, for example, so that the total reserved memory number can be specified, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number cannot be specified. Can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred in the command transmission / reception operation that is performed to display the total number of reserved memories that is the total number of stored pending data.

  When it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 is a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in the processing of steps S551 and S557 shown in FIG. 64, the all-revariable display operation identified from the variation pattern 61 is executed in accordance with the symbol variation control pattern determined in step S517 of FIG. 62 according to the number of executions of the symbol, the temporary stop symbol determined in step S558, and the like. Thus, based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After all the decorative symbols are changed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is possible to execute a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in which the effect display changed again is performed a predetermined number of times. In response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S268 shown in FIG. 50, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A set in step S270 for use in the determination in step S273. ~ 135C, any of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state after executing the specific effect of "pseudo-continuous" Table data is configured so that it can be determined. In this way, for example, it varies depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the reach state instead of the type of effect operation in the specific effect such as whether or not to execute the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. By determining the variation pattern type using the decision table that classifies the pattern type, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation unlike the design. It is possible to improve amusement entertainment by executing a large production operation at a predetermined rate close to the design.

  Based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, the CPU 103 executes the small hit release pre-processing in step S118 and the small hit release process in step S119 shown in FIG. In the same way as the two round big hit state, the variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is executed. Then, when the small hit gaming state is ended, for example, by not changing the state of the probability change flag or the short time flag in the small hit end processing of step S120 shown in FIG. 47, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed. . Thereby, even when the normal state continues, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for being controlled to the probability variation state and improve the game entertainment.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. 14E, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132J shown in FIG. 15C, and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132M shown in FIG. The table data is configured to include a variation pattern type common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the game is controlled to the big hit state or the small hit game state depending on the variation pattern type, and the expectation for being controlled to the probable state is maintained. Can improve the game entertainment. In addition, when the variable display result is “small hit” and when the big hit type is “surprise”, it is possible to determine the common variation pattern type, so that the variable pattern can be determined Regardless of whether the display result is “small hit” or the big hit type is “surprise”, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced. .

  When the big hit type is “probable”, for example, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern is a plurality of types in steps S508 and S509 shown in FIG. 63, and finally stops according to the determination result. The decorative design that is the design is determined. As a result, when the big hit type is “surprise”, various combinations of confirmed decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed as a variable display result, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 13, a plurality of jackpot types are selected based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. The table data is configured so that the ratio at which the big hit type is determined as “fourth probability variation” or “surprise accuracy” is different. Thereby, the player's expectation for being controlled to the two round big hit state according to which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied can be made different, and the game entertainment can be improved. In particular, when the second start condition is satisfied, the big hit type is not determined to be “surprising accuracy”, so that the big start winning opening is easily controlled in the wide open state such as the probability changing state or the short time state. It is possible to prevent the gaming interests from deteriorating when the type is “accurate”, and it is possible to increase the frequency at which award balls are paid out in the probability variation state or the short time state. In addition, when the second start condition is satisfied, the big hit type is not determined to be “fourth probability variation”. For example, in the probability variation state where the second start winning opening is easily controlled to the expanded open state, Since it is difficult to determine the big hit type of “fourth probability change” in which the same effect is executed as when the big hit type of “is”, it is possible to prevent the game entertainment from deteriorating.

  The CPU 103 can specify the variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 46 based on the transmission setting in step S279 shown in FIG. A variable display result notification command and a variation pattern designation command capable of specifying a variation pattern are transmitted. On the side of the effect control board 12, for example, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect operation that becomes a notice effect during variable display of decorative symbols by executing the notice effect setting process in step S 516 shown in FIG. The determination operation and the presentation operation that becomes the notice presentation effect are determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in step S593 shown in FIG. 66, the notice pattern type determination table 170 as shown in FIG. 39 is used to determine one of a plurality of kinds of notice pattern types. If any one of these is determined, at step S595, one of the notification pattern determination tables 171A to 171C as shown in FIGS. decide. Then, the symbol variation control pattern and the notice effect control pattern determined in step S517 shown in FIG. 62 corresponding to the specific effect pattern and the notice pattern determined based on the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. Accordingly, the decorative symbol variation process of step S162 shown in FIG. 61 is executed. In this way, by performing determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the notice effect by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12, the progress of the game is controlled by the CPU 103 etc. on the main board 11 side. It is possible to improve amusement entertainment by executing a variety of presentation operations as a notice effect while preventing an increase in the control burden.

  In the notice pattern type determination table 170 shown in FIG. 39, the table data is configured so as not to execute the notice effect whose execution period overlaps with the specific effect, for example, when the specific effect of “Intro” is executed. Yes. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a plurality of types of performance operations from overlapping, and to prevent a decrease in performance effects due to the player's interest being dispersed.

  In the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 32 (B), when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the intro is determined depending on whether the previous effect buffer value is “1” to “3”. The allocation of the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern to each specific effect pattern of TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 is made different, and is the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” executed last time. Table data is configured so as not to be a specific performance pattern. As a result, a variety of performance operations can be caused to appear without causing a bias, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the notice pattern classification determination table 170 shown in FIG. 39 and the notice pattern determination tables 171A to 171C shown in FIGS. 40 to 42, the notice effect can be executed even in the case of the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach”. The table data is configured. As a result, even if the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not reach the reach state, it is possible to execute the effect operation that becomes a notice effect, thereby enhancing the player's expectation for reaching the reach state and improving the game entertainment Can do.

  In the notice pattern determination table 171 </ b> C shown in FIG. 42, when the variation pattern corresponds to “non-reach” and is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, the variation display state of the decorative symbol is a variation pattern in which the reach state is reached. The ratio of executing the notice effect is lower than that of the time, and the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than that of the change pattern corresponding to “non-reach” and the specific effect is not executed. Table data is configured. This reduces the case where the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state when the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is executed, and the case where the specific effect is not executed when the effect operation that becomes the notice effect is executed. By further reducing, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for reaching a reach state when a notice effect is performed, and to improve the gaming interest.

  The effect control CPU 120 checks the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30 in the decorative symbol variation process of step S162 shown in FIG. 61, and corresponds to the operation detection signal being turned on. The effect operation in the notice effect is changed by switching the notice effect control pattern. Thereby, the notice effect according to the operation by the player is possible, and the game interest can be improved.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs the processing in steps S504, S505, and S506 shown in FIG. 62 based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and the like. By executing the processing of steps S510, S512, and S513 shown in FIG. 63, the final decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. Decide on. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect operation in the specific effect by executing the process of step S558 shown in FIG. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S576 shown in FIG. 65 to determine the decoration pattern of the normal jackpot combination to be temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect operation in the changing promotion effect. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Deciding the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the plurality of decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while preventing an increase in the control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 103 or the like on the main board 11 side. Can do.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S558 shown in FIG. 64 when the specific effect of “simulated ream” is executed, thereby combining the temporary stop symbols that become one of the spurious chance chances GC1 to GC8. To decide. Thereby, various entertainment operations can be performed to improve the game entertainment while preventing an increase in control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 103 or the like on the main board 11 side.

  When the “slip” specific effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S558 shown in FIG. 64 to determine the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “slip” specific effect. . Thereby, various entertainment operations can be performed to improve the game entertainment while preventing an increase in control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 103 or the like on the main board 11 side.

  In response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol becoming the reach state, the effect control CPU 120 first uses the final stop symbol determining table 162A in the process of step S506 shown in FIG. The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R other than the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C to be stopped are determined. After that, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the ornament symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” ornament symbol display area 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last is determined. In addition, in response to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right appearance determination table in the process of step S505 shown in FIG. By determining the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed with reference to 161, it is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, and even if it is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances shown in FIG. GC1 to GC8, development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 7B, sudden chances TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 7C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Determine the combination of finalized decorative symbols. Thereby, it can prevent giving a player a misunderstanding about whether a special effect is performed.

  When the CPU 120 for effect control is the “first probability change” jackpot type that can execute the promotion effect during the change, the final decoration symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the probability change jackpot combination in step S513 shown in FIG. 63 is displayed. decide. Then, in step S574 of FIG. 65, it is determined whether or not the changing promotion effect is executed by referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. At this time, if it is determined that the changing promotion effect is to be executed, the decorative symbols constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to in step S576 by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. The decoration design to be temporarily stopped by the promotion effect during change is determined. Thus, even when the “first probability change” jackpot type that can execute the changing promotion effect is provided, a case where the changing promotion effect is executed and a case where the changing promotion effect is not executed are provided. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by enabling various performance operations while preventing an increase in the control burden for controlling the progress of the game.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines a final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol constituting the normal jackpot combination in step S512 of FIG. 63 in the case of the “third probability variation” jackpot type for executing the jackpot promotion effect. . As a result, it is difficult to recognize whether or not to be controlled to the probable change state from the variable display result of the decorative symbol when the notification effect that the probable change state is entered after the control to the big hit gaming state is started. Thus, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification effect and improve the game entertainment.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. In the above embodiment, the movable display device 50 is operated by the structure as shown in FIG. 4, but the structure of the movable display device 50 is not limited to this, and the movable display device 50 executes a notice effect. Any structure may be used as long as a suitable operation can be realized. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the wiring 96 connected to the display member 52 is fixed to the wiring fixing portion 95 provided on the base portion 90, but the structure in which the movement range of the wiring 96 can be suppressed. Any structure can be used.

  The movable display device 50 is operated when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, and is operated when the advancement effect of “movable display device” is executed, and the display image 51 is displayed on the display screen 51. In addition to executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, a notice effect using the movable display device 50 may be executed. Moreover, you may use the movable display apparatus 50 at another timing, when performing effects other than a notice effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the movable display device 50 is provided below the image display device 5 and moved from the normal position to the overlapping position by advancing upward, but around the image display device 5, It may be provided anywhere (for example, top, left, right). For example, when provided above the image display device 5, the structure shown in FIG.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53B, the third release pattern is the same release pattern as the second release pattern as the release control pattern when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”. An open KP2, an open KP3, and an open KP5 whose third open pattern is different from the second open pattern are prepared. An open control pattern may be prepared. Further, instead of or in addition to the opening KP2 and the opening KP3, an opening control pattern such as the opening KP9 and the opening KP10 as shown in FIG. 81 may be prepared. For this purpose, the process of steps S248 to S250 shown in FIG. Then, any one of these release control patterns is set in the process of step S317 shown in FIG. In addition, in accordance with the opening control pattern set in step S317 and the count value in the big prize opening number counter in step S319, the setting for opening the big prize opening is performed. Then, the release control based on the processing opening control pattern during the big prize opening opening process of step S115 shown in FIG. 47 may be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 82 (A), in the first round of opening KP6, the opening for 0.5 seconds is repeated twice, but this opening interval is 1.0 second, and the third opening. The opening interval in the pattern is different from the second opening pattern. Then, after a holding time of 1.0 second, release for 27.0 seconds is performed. In addition to the opening control patterns of the opening KP2 and the opening KP3, by providing an opening control pattern having different opening intervals in the third opening pattern, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 82 (B), in the first round of opening KP7, the opening for 0.5 seconds is repeated three times, then the holding time of 1.0 seconds, and then the opening for 26.5 seconds is performed. . Thus, the number of times of opening in the third opening pattern is different from that of the second opening pattern. In addition to the opening control patterns of the opening KP2 and the opening KP3, by providing an opening control pattern having a different number of opening times in the third opening pattern, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  As shown in FIGS. 81 and 83A, in the first round of opening KP8, the opening for 0.5 seconds is performed once. Then, after 0.5 seconds is released once in the second round, the release is performed for 28.5 seconds after the holding time of 1.0 seconds. As described above, the number of rounds in which the opening control based on the third opening pattern is executed is different from that of the second opening pattern. In addition to the opening control patterns of the opening KP2 and the opening KP3, by providing an opening control pattern in which the number of rounds in which the opening control based on the third opening pattern is executed is different, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. .

  As shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 83 (B), in the first round of opening KP9, the opening of 0.5 times is repeated twice, and the opening of 29.5 seconds of the second round is performed after 1.0 second. Do. As shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 84 (A), in the first round of opening KP10, 0.5 opening is repeated twice, and after 2 seconds, 29.5 seconds of the second round. Open. That is, in the opening control pattern of opening KP9 and opening KP10, only the opening based on the third opening pattern similar to the second opening pattern is performed in the first round, and the opening for the fourth time based on the fourth opening pattern is not performed. It is like that. The interval between the first round for performing the opening based on the third opening pattern and the second round for performing the opening based on the fourth opening pattern is different. The opening KP9 and the opening KP10 in which the opening similar to the second opening pattern is performed in the third opening pattern may be prepared instead of or in addition to the opening KP2 and the opening KP3. It should be noted that at least one release control pattern for performing the same opening as the second release pattern in the third release pattern is prepared, and at least one of the release KP2, the release KP3, the release KP9, and the release KP10 is prepared. It may be.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 78, FIG. 79A, etc., the variable display result is a big hit to the player by executing the big hit start presentation display at the timing T = T39 or T50 when the big winning opening is opened. We were informed that it became. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of “fourth probability variation”, it may be notified that a big hit has been made at another timing. For example, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), when the release control pattern is release KP3, a predetermined period after the decorative symbol fixed stop display timing T = T34 is provided as the operation button effective period, and the operation button is operated during the operation button effective period. When the button 30 is operated, the big hit start time effect display may be started. For example, when the timing T = T51 to T53 shown in FIG. 84 (B) is the operation button valid period, if the operation button 30 is operated at the timing T = T52, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the big hit The start effect display (for example, the display shown in FIG. 80E) may be executed earlier. Thereby, the player can recognize that it is a big hit quickly by operating the operation button 30, and can improve the interest of the game.

  In the above embodiment, the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “third probability variation”, or the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” or “surprise probability”. It is determined whether the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 are used at different ratios depending on whether the total number of reserved memories is less than a predetermined number or the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Explained as a thing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the chances of development HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 7B and the chances of success TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. , “First Probability”, “Second Probability”, “Third Probability”, or whether the jackpot type is “Fourth Probability” or “Sudden Probability”, or the total number of stored memories is predetermined It may be determined at a different ratio depending on whether the number is less than the number or the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more.

  In the above embodiment, in the specific effect of “Development Chance”, the decorative display variable display state becomes the reach state by temporarily stopping display of the decorative symbols constituting any of the development chances HC1 to HC8. Or, after reaching the reach state, it is suggested to the player that the variable display result is “big hit”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after temporarily displaying a decorative pattern that becomes a non-reach combination or reach-losing combination, as shown in FIGS. 72 (E1) to (E6), Only by performing an effect display that rotates the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the reverse direction, the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state, and the variable display result after the reach state becomes “big hit” May be suggested to the player.

  Further, even in the specific effect of “pseudo ream”, the decorative symbols constituting any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 are not temporarily stopped and displayed, but the decorative symbols that are non-reach combinations or reach lose combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 72 (E1) to (E6), the decorative design is changed again only by performing an effect display that rotates the decorative design that is temporarily displayed in the reverse direction. You may make it suggest to a player that it is (pseudo continuous fluctuation). Alternatively, the decorative symbols may be changed (pseudo-continuous variation) again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after displaying the decorative symbols that will be non-reach combinations or reach-losing combinations temporarily without displaying any indications that suggest to the player. It may be only.

  Further, even when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the non-reach combination, without temporarily displaying the decorative symbols constituting any of the random chances TC1 to TC4, After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols for the reach-losing combination, as shown in FIGS. 72 (E1) to (E6), an effect display for rotating the decorative symbols displayed for temporary stop in the reverse direction is displayed. It may be possible to suggest to the player that the jackpot type is “accuracy” only by performing. Alternatively, it is also possible to start the stunning effect display only after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after temporarily displaying the decorative pattern that will be a non-reach combination or reach-miss combination without performing an effect display that suggests to the player. In this case, even when the stop-displayed decorative pattern is a non-reach combination or a reach-losing combination, the color pattern indicating “yellow” corresponding to when the jackpot type is “surprise” is stopped and displayed. You just have to do it.

  Alternatively, a plurality of types of decorative symbol combinations that make up development chances, pseudo-continuous chances, and chances of success are provided in common, and one of the combinations of multiple types of decorative symbols (common chances) is temporarily stopped. In such a case, it may be possible to develop into any of a predetermined reach effect, a “pseudo-ream” specific effect, and a surprise effect. In this case, when the first common chance item (for example, a combination of decorative symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “4”, and “4”) among the plurality of types of common chance items is temporarily displayed, a predetermined reach is reached. When the second common chance (for example, a combination of decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “1”, and “2”) is temporarily stopped and displayed, it develops as a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. When the third common chance (for example, a combination of decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “5”) is temporarily displayed, the final stop is made so that it is easy to develop into a stunning effect. The symbol determination tables 163C and 163D and the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D may be set.

  In the above embodiment, when one of the reach effect α1 to the reach effect α3 or the reach effect β1 to the reach effect β3 is executed, not only the color design change but also the decorative design change is continuously executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when any one of the reach effect α1 to the reach effect α3 and the reach effect β1 to the reach effect β3 is executed, only the variation of the color pattern is continued. The decorative design may not be displayed. In this case, when the specific effect of “Development Chance” is executed and developed into a reach effect, the decorative display variable display state does not become the reach state.

  In the above embodiment, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” or “fourth probability variation”, the total re-variable display in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” by the total number of reserved memories The description has been made assuming that the number of times the operation is executed is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or variable Even when the display result is “losing”, the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” may be made different depending on the total number of stored storage. For example, in the case of a specific total pending storage number (for example, “3”), the variable display result is “big hit” with respect to the allocation to the variation pattern that is the number of execution times of the specific total re-variable display operation (for example, “3”). It may be made different depending on whether it is “lost” or not. In this way, depending on the total number of reserved memories, the reliability with respect to the variable display result being “big hit” and the reliability with respect to the big hit type being one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. In addition, it is possible to vary the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation with high reliability for the variable display mode to be the reach mode.

  In the above embodiment, the allocation to the number of executions of the total re-variable display operation in the “pseudo-continuous” specific production is described as being different depending on the total number of reserved memories, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the allocation for which one of a plurality of specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo-ream”, “intro”, “expansion opportunity”, “end of development opportunity” is executed is changed according to the total number of reserved memories Good.

  In the above embodiment, the variation pattern determined when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, and the variation pattern determined when the big hit type is “surprise probability” It demonstrated as what becomes the same fluctuation | variation aspect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern determined when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the variable display result is “small hit”. The variation pattern may be the same as the variation pattern determined in the case of, and the variation pattern determined when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” In addition, the variation mode may be the same as both of the variation patterns determined when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  In the above embodiment, the notice pattern depends on whether the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, “fourth probability variation”, or “surprise probability”. By changing the ratio determined to one of the YP2-1 to the notice pattern YP2-4, the number of steps in the notice effect that becomes the “step-up image” is changed to “normal”, “first probability change” to The number of steps is determined to be one of a plurality of steps at a different determination ratio depending on whether it is “third probability variation”, “fourth probability variation”, or “surprising accuracy”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” in the case where the effect mode in the effect operation that becomes the notice effect can be changed stepwise multiple times. It is only necessary that the number of changes in the production mode is determined to any one of a plurality of types at different determination ratios depending on whether the change is “fourth probability change” or “surprising accuracy”. Here, as the notice effect that can change the effect mode a plurality of times stepwise, for example, the effect that the displayed characters increase stepwise or the operation of the displayed characters changes stepwise Any directing action may be used.

  In the above embodiment, special PG1-1, special PG1-2, special PG1-6, special PG1-3 to special PG1-5, special PG3-1 to special PG3-3, special PH1-3 to special PH1-5 In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the special PH 3-1 to the special PH 3-3, it is determined as either the no-notification or the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1 where the effect image is not switched. In the case of the variation pattern of PG2-2, it has been described that it is determined as either no notice or a notice pattern of notice YP2-2 in which no effect image is switched. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Special PG1-1, special PG1-2, special PG1-6, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PG1-3, special PG1-5, special Even in the case of the variation pattern of PG3-1 to special PG3-3, special PH1-3 to special PH1-5, special PH3-1 to special PH3-3, the effect images such as the notice YP2-3 and notice YP2-4 are displayed. The notice pattern to be switched may be determined. In this way, even when the big hit type is “fourth probability change” or “surprise”, it is possible to switch the effect image in the notice effect of the “step-up image”. In this case, the assignment of the random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern to each of the notice patterns of the notice YP2-1 to the notice YP2-4 without notice, the jackpot type is “normal”, “number The variation pattern determined corresponding to being “1st probability variation” to “third probability variation” is different from the variation pattern determined corresponding to the big hit type being “fourth probability variation” or “surprising probability”. It should be set as follows. In addition, in the variation pattern determined in response to the big hit type being “fourth probability variation” and the variation pattern determined in correspondence to the big hit type being “surprising”, the apparent production mode is The same variable display patterns may be assigned the same random number SR8-2 for determining the second notice pattern for each of the notice patterns of no notice, notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-4. In this way, based on the number of times the effect image is switched in the notice effect of the “step-up image”, the player is in the 15 round big hit state, the 2 round big hit state, or the sudden appearance fifteen round big hit state. While it will be easier to predict in advance, it will be harder to predict in advance whether it will be a 2-round jackpot game or a fake 15-round jackpot, so it will improve the fun of the game during the variable display of decorative symbols Can do.

  In the above embodiment, after the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the big hit type is “normal” when the variable display result is “big hit”, the short hit state is controlled and the big hit type is “first”. It has been described that after the big hit gaming state based on the fact that it has become “probability change” to “fourth probability change”, it is controlled to the probability change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the case where the jackpot type is “normal” and “accuracy”, a case of “suddenly short” may be provided.

  In the case of providing a “suddenly short” jackpot type instead of “normal” and “probability”, the ROM 101 may include a jackpot type determination table 231 as shown in FIG. When the determination that the variable display result is “big hit” is made, the big hit type determination table 231 sets the variable display mode of the decorative symbol as “suddenly short” based on the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state in the same way as the big hit type is “surprising”, and the two round big hit state is After the end, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, the time is controlled to be in a short time state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “fourth probability change”, it is controlled to the sudden short fake 15 round big hit state, and after the sudden short fake 15 round big hit state ends. Unlike the case where the big hit type is “suddenly short”, it is controlled to the probability variation state. The big hit type determination table 231 indicates whether the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 25 is “1” or “2”. Correspondingly, the random number value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is composed of data for determination assigned to the big hit types of “sudden time reduction” and “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”. Also, the jackpot type determination table 231 determines the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 25 (the jackpot type buffer value) based on the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type. Table data (setting data) for setting to any of “08”, “01” to “04” corresponding to the jackpot type that has been set may be included. It should be noted that, in the “fourth probability variation”, it is only necessary to set a big hit having any of a plurality of release patterns among the release control patterns KP2, KP3, KP5 to KP10 as in the above-described embodiment. . For example, in the big hit type determination table 231, when it is determined to be “fourth probability variation”, a determination for determining one of the release control patterns is performed. Further, in addition to the big hit types of “sudden time reduction” and “first probability change” to “fourth probability change”, a big hit type of “surprise accuracy” may be provided.

  Here, in the setting of the big hit type determination table 231 shown in FIG. 85, the big hit type for the big hit type of “fourth probability change” depends on whether the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. The assignment of the random number MR2-1 for determination is different. That is, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, among the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type, “100” is assigned to the big hit type of the “fourth probability variation”, while the fluctuation special value is designated. When the figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is not assigned to the big hit type of “fourth probability variation”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the ratio at which the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability variation” can be varied.

  47, when the jackpot type is determined to be “suddenly short” in the process of step S249 shown in FIG. 49, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is After changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player by opening the grand prize opening for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the special prize opening is opened. By setting the closed state, the control for temporarily changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the second state which is disadvantageous for the player is executed, for example, twice.

  FIG. 86 is a timing chart for explaining an example of transition of the gaming state when the variable display result is “big hit” and a display operation example in the image display device 5. Here, in this modified example, when the gaming state is not a certain probability state such as a normal state, the same effect display as in FIGS. 71 to 80 is performed. However, instead of the probability variation entry effect, a time-short entry effect for informing the shift to the time-saving state is executed. When the game state is a probable change state, an effect operation in a battle effect in which a teammate character and an enemy character fight is executed over a plurality of fluctuating display of decorative symbols. In this battle effect, when the teammate character wins the battle, it is controlled to the 15th round big hit state, and after the 15th round big hit state is finished, it is continuously controlled to the probability variation state. On the other hand, when the ally character loses the battle (the enemy character wins), control is made to the 2nd round big hit state, and after the 2nd round big hit state is finished, the probability change state is finished and the control is shifted to the normal state. Is done. As shown in FIG. 86 (A), when the gaming state is in a probable variation state, the jackpot type is any one of “first certain variation” to “third certain variation” in the process of step S249 illustrated in FIG. When it is determined, in the process of changing the decorative pattern in step S162 shown in FIG. 61, along with the decorative display of the decorative pattern, for example, an effect operation in a battle effect in which the ally character fights against the enemy character is executed. Then, after the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”, the fixed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed. In the battle production, a production operation is performed in which the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character. Then, while such an effect operation is being executed, the gaming state is shifted to the 15 round big hit state, and for example, a notification image indicating that the variable display result is a big hit is displayed at the center of the display area. A jackpot start effect display, a notification image indicating the number of rounds, a jackpot effect display for displaying the effect image in the jackpot gaming state, and an ending effect display as an effect operation for notifying the end of the 15 round jackpot state are sequentially executed. To be. After the 15th round big hit state is finished, the game state is continuously controlled to the probability change state, and for example, an effect image in which the ally character and the enemy character face each other is displayed as a background image different from that in the normal state. For example, the player may be informed that the probability variation state continues.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), when the game state is in a probabilistic state, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly short” in the process of step S249 shown in FIG. In the same manner as when the jackpot type is determined as one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” in addition to the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol variation processing of step S162 shown in FIG. To be executed. After the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined sudden time-short chance is stopped and displayed. At the same time, for example, an effect operation in which the teammate character loses the battle with the enemy character in a battle effect is executed. Then, during the execution of such an effect operation, after the game state is shifted to the 2-round big hit state and the opening control of the first round is performed, for example, an effect image for informing that the state shifts to the short-time state The short entry display is executed when displaying. Then, after the two round big hit state is finished, the game state is controlled to shift to the short-time state, and the player is given a probability change state by, for example, displaying a background image different from the normal state and the probability change state. What is necessary is just to alert | report that it complete | finishes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), when the gaming state is in the probability variation state, when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability variation” in the process of step S249 shown in FIG. 49, FIG. When the big hit type is determined as one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” or the big hit type is “suddenly shortened”, along with the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol variation processing of step S162 shown in FIG. As in the case of the determination, the effect operation in the battle effect is executed. Then, after the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, such as “Left” → “Right” → “Medium”, the final decorative symbol that is the short chance is stopped and displayed as a big hit. In the same way as when the type is determined to be “suddenly short”, an effect operation in which the ally character loses the battle with the enemy character in the battle effect is executed. Then, after such a performance operation is being executed, after the gaming state is suddenly shifted to the fake 15 round big hit state and the first round opening control is performed, An effect operation in a resurrection effect is performed in which the character revives the ally character by, for example, injecting the ally character who has lost the battle with the enemy character. Subsequently, in the same way as when the jackpot type is determined to be any one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the notification image indicating the number of rounds and the effect display during the jackpot display that displays the effect image in the jackpot gaming state Then, the ending effect display as the effect operation for notifying the end of the state of the short-term fake 15 round jackpot is executed sequentially. Then, after the short-term fake 15 round big hit state is ended, the game state is continuously controlled to the probability change state, and the player is surely changed by displaying an effect image in which the teammate character and the enemy character face each other. May be informed that the process continues.

  Thus, when the big hit type is determined as one of “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation” or “sudden time reduction” in step S249 shown in FIG. 49, the probability variation state is determined in step S375 shown in FIG. When the setting for starting the control is performed, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is continuously controlled to the probability changing state. As a result, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 has a large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) that is the first time or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. When the round in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is executed by making the open state, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is continuously controlled to the probability changing state, This is continued until the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly short” in step S249, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player when the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state. In addition, when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability change” in step S249, the teammate character is defeated in the battle with the enemy character in the battle effect as when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly short”. When the round that changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is executed in the middle of the performance operation, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is continuously changed to the probability changing state. Be controlled. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the player that the control to the certain change state is ended and to continue, so that the player's gaming interest can be further enhanced.

  In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is not assigned to the big hit type of “fourth probable change”. A lot of random numbers MR2-1 for determining the big hit type are assigned to the big hit type of “third probability variation”. As a result, the variable display result is “suddenly shortened” in the probability-changing state, and the probability-changing state ends. Therefore, the teammate character is displayed as an enemy character in the same battle effect as when the jackpot type is determined to be “suddenly shortening”. By executing the production action that defeats the battle with the player, it is assumed that the probabilistic state ends, and the production action of the revival production is executed as a big hit start production. Can be improved. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, for example, the second start winning opening is controlled to be in the normally open state by not determining the big hit type as “fourth probability variation”. In the normal gaming state, after a staging operation that causes the teammate character to lose the battle with the enemy character in a battle production, the doctor revives the teammate character by, for example, injecting an injection into the teammate character. Since the production operation in the production is extremely difficult to perform, it is possible to prevent the game entertainment from deteriorating.

  Also, the jackpot is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is established by the setting of the big hit type determination table 231 shown in FIG. Based on the case where the type is determined as one of a plurality of types and the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established, the jackpot type is selected. The ratio at which the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability variation” can be made different depending on whether it is determined as one of a plurality of types. Thereby, in the battle production, when the production action that the teammate character loses the battle is executed, depending on whether this is based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition, Thereafter, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 opens the big winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) which is the first time or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. By setting the open state, it is possible to change the player's expectation that the round in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is executed. Can be increased.

  In the above embodiment, in the big hit control effect production process in step S164 shown in FIG. 61, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the second round and subsequent rounds are under hit control. In the above description, it is assumed that when the big hit types such as CRD2-1,... Are "first probability change" and "second probability change", the effect operation in the effect during the big hit is executed according to the same effect control pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 44, the big hit type is any one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. Different “fourth probability variation” jackpot type-specific performance control patterns are provided for each round, and when the jackpot type is “fourth probability variation”, the performance in the jackpot performance according to these performance control patterns An operation may be performed. In addition, a plurality of types of effect control patterns common to the first jackpot type “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, and “fourth probability variation” are provided for each number of rounds, An effect operation in a big hit effect may be executed.

  In this case, the determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, a 15-times-opening effect pattern determination table 172A shown in FIG. 87A as a table for determining any of the 15-time-opening effect patterns. include. 87A, the effect pattern determination table 172A for 15-time opening is based on a predetermined random number for determining the effect pattern for 15-time opening when the effect for opening 15 times is executed as a big hit effect. This table is referred to in order to determine the effect pattern during the 15-time opening as either the opening FP1 or the opening FP2. The 15th opening effect pattern determination table 172A determines whether the big hit type is “first probability change”, “second probability change”, or “fourth probability change”, and “15th release effect pattern determination”. For example, determination data to be assigned to the effect pattern during opening 15 times of opening FP1 and opening FP2.

  Here, for the big hit type of “fourth probability variation”, in the 15-time-opening effect pattern determination table 172A shown in FIG. 87A, the 15-time release effect pattern of the release FP1 is released 15 times. On the other hand, although the random value for determining the middle effect pattern is not assigned, for the effect pattern for opening 15 times of the open FP2, among the random values for determining the effect pattern during 15 times open, “1” ˜ A value in the range of “100” is assigned. On the other hand, for the big hit types of “first probability variation” and “second probability variation”, in the effect pattern determination table 172A for 15 times open shown in FIG. Among the random values for determining the effect pattern during the 15th opening, values in the range of “1” to “99” are assigned, while for the 15th opening effect pattern of the opening FP2, “100” is assigned among the random values for determining the effect pattern during opening. Therefore, when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the effect pattern is determined to be 15 times of opening FP1 compared to the cases where the big hit type is “first probability variation” and “second probability variation”. While the ratio becomes lower, the ratio determined for the effect pattern during the 15th opening of the opening FP2 becomes higher.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation end process executed in step S163 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation end process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S531). At this time, if a hit start designation command is received (step S531; Yes), it is determined whether the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit” or “small hit” ( Step S532).

  When it is determined in step S532 that the variable display result is “big hit” (step S532; Yes), the big hit type specified from the hit start designation command is “first probability change”, “ It is determined whether it is either “2nd probability change” or “4th probability change” (step S533). At this time, if the big hit type is any of “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, and “fourth probability variation” (step S533; Yes), the effect pattern determination during the 15th opening shown in FIG. 87 (A) is determined. After setting the table 172A as a usage table (step S534), for example, numerical data indicating random values for determining the effect pattern determination during the 15th opening is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like ( Step S535).

  Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value extracted in step S535, the big hit type is either “first probability variation” or “second probability variation” by referring to the effect pattern determination table 172A being opened 15 times. Depending on whether or not it is “fourth probability variation”, it is determined as one of the 15-time effect patterns of opening FP1 and opening FP2 (step S536). Thereafter, in accordance with the determination result of step S536, for example, the values of the 15th opening effect designating buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (15th opening effect designating buffer value) are set to “1” and “2”. (Step S537). In the process of step S537, when it is determined in step S536 that the 15th opening effect pattern of opening FP1 is determined, “1” is set in the 15th opening effect designating buffer value, while in step S536, the opening FP2 is set. When the 15th opening effect pattern is determined, “2” is set to the 15th opening effect designation buffer value.

  When it is determined in step S533 that the big hit type is not any of “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, and “fourth probability variation” (step S533; No), after executing the processing of step S537 Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to “4” (step S538). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S532 that the variable display result is “small hit” (step S532; No), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” (step S539).

If it is determined in step S531 that the hit start designation command has not been received (step S531; No), for example, by checking the production control process timer value, the predetermined time is not received. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (step S540). At this time, if the predetermined period has not elapsed (step S540; Yes), the decorative symbol variation end process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command in step S540 (step S540; Yes), the rendering process corresponds to the fact that the variable display result is “lost”. The value of the flag is updated to “0” (step S541).

  In the process of step S610 shown in FIG. 67, the jackpot effect according to the 15-time-opening effect designation buffer value set in the process of step S537 and the number of rounds that is the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state, By performing the setting for executing the effect operation, the effect operation in the big hit effect according to the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect pattern during the opening 15 times of either the open FP1 or the open FP2 is executed. You can do it. When the big hit type is “normal”, hit start CST1-2-2, hit control CRD1-2-2, hit control CRD2-2-2,... Hit end CED1-2-2, etc. It is only necessary that the effect operation in the big hit effect according to the effect control pattern is executed. When the big hit type is “third probability variation”, hit start CST1-2-1, hit control CRD1-2-1, hit control CRD2-2-1,... Hit end CED1-2 It is only necessary that the effect operation in the big hit effect according to the effect control pattern such as 1 is executed. When the big hit type is “surprise”, the combination of the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-1, hit control CRE1-1, hit end CED2-1, hit start CST2-2, hit control CRE1 -2, The effect operation in the big hit effect according to any of the combination of the effect control patterns of the winning end CED2-2 may be executed.

  In addition, in the determination table stored in the ROM 121, as a table for determining the 15-time opening effect pattern as one of a plurality of types, instead of the 15-time opening effect pattern determination table 172A shown in FIG. 87 (A), You may make it include the effect pattern determination table 172B in 15 times open | release shown to FIG. 87 (B). As a result, the number of times the 15-round big hit state is performed without the big hit type being either “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, and without being in the middle of 2 round big hit state or suddenly appearing 15 round big hit state ( When the number of times of continuation) is less than 5 times, the effect operation in the big hit effect is executed according to the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect pattern during opening 15 times of the opening FP1, and the number of times of continuation is 5 times or more Or, when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the effect operation in the big hit effect according to the effect control pattern corresponding to the 15-time open effect pattern of the opening FP2 is executed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the description has been given on the assumption that the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 are stopped and displayed as the final stop symbols common to the case where the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” and “the probability accuracy”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the common final stop symbol that is stopped and displayed may be a fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination.

  In the above-described embodiment, an effect operation with the same visual appearance mode is executed between the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137C shown in FIG. 21B and the setting of the hit change pattern determination table 137D shown in FIG. The description has been given assuming that the range of the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern assigned to the variation pattern is the same. However, it may be set so that the player does not know whether the jackpot type is determined to be “fourth probability change” or “surprise” from the apparent performance mode of the performance operation. It is not necessary for the variation pattern determination table 137C and the variation pattern determination table 137D to be completely the same in the allocation of the variation pattern determination random value MR4 to the variation pattern that executes the same presentation operation.

  In the above embodiment, when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” or “surprise probability”, the total number of reserved storage is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”) or more than a predetermined number. Deciding whether or not to execute the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, determining the number of executions of all re-variable display operations, determining the chance of the chance of the pseudo-ream chance, determining whether or not to execute the notice effect It has been described that a high-reliability effect is made different by changing the ratio and the determination rate of the effect display mode in the notice effect such as the number of times the effect image is switched in the notice effect of the “step-up image”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the total number of reserved storage is a predetermined number (for example, “5”). ) The ratio of determining whether or not to execute a specific effect of “pseudo-continuity”, the ratio of determining the number of executions of all re-variable display operations, and the chance of the pseudo-reaming chance opportunity The determination ratio of the effect display mode in the notice effect such as the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the notice effect, the number of switching of the effect image in the notice effect of the “step-up image”, and the like may be different.

  In the above embodiment, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” or “surprise accuracy”, the decorative symbols are sequentially displayed in a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. In the above description, the display is switched to the effect image in the sudden effect display when the stop display (temporary stop display) is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing for switching to the effect image in the surprise effect display is arbitrary. For example, when the confirmed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the effect image is switched to the effect image in the sudden effect display. Alternatively, when it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received in the process of step S531 shown in FIG. Furthermore, it may be switched to the effect image in the sudden effect display when the switching timing predetermined for the variation pattern comes.

  In the above embodiment, the data indicating the control contents of various effect operations such as the variable display operation of the decorative symbol and the effect display operation in the accompaniment effect display are the symbol variation control pattern, the hit start, the hit control, and the hit end. It was described as being divided and stored in the production control pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be stored as a series of effect display operations. In this case, when the big hit type is “probable”, the setting for starting a series of effect display is performed in the processing of steps S518 and S519 shown in FIG. 62, and steps S162 to S166 shown in FIG. A series of effect display set in the processes of steps S518 and S519 shown in FIG. 62 may be continuously performed without resetting the setting for starting the effect display in the process. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “fourth probability change”, the series of effect display is switched from the series of effect display to the effect display at the start of the jackpot in response to reception of the designation command after the first round winning opening is opened. What should I do? Further, the series of effect display may be executed in the common effect control process regardless of whether the decorative symbols are being variably displayed or in the big hit gaming state. Furthermore, the variation pattern and variation pattern designation command for the case where the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” and “surprise probability” are common, and on the rendering control board 12 side, the rendering control CPU 120 is variable. By reading the EXT data of the display result notification command, it may be specified whether the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” or “surprise accuracy”.

  In the embodiment described above, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 executes the process of step S593 and the process of step S595 shown in FIG. The determination as to whether or not to execute the action and the presentation action as the notice effect are determined to be any of a plurality of types, and the processing of steps S504, S505, and S506 shown in FIG. 62, and step S510 shown in FIG. By executing the processing of S512 and S513, and further the processing of step S558 shown in FIG. 64 and the processing of step S576 shown in FIG. 65, the decorative symbol display areas 5L for “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. It has been described that the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed at 5C and 5R are determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an effect operation that becomes a notice effect during variable display of decorative symbols by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the effect operation, for example. The determination as to whether or not to execute, and the determination of any one of a plurality of types of effect operations as a notice effect and the determination of the decorative symbols to be stopped may be performed in a shared manner.

  As an example, a display control board 16 as shown in FIG. 89 is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. On the display control board 16, a display control CPU 140, a ROM 141, a RAM 142, a random number circuit 143, and an I / O 144 are mounted. In this case, since the display control CPU 140 mounted on the display control board 16 executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The displayed control unit 123 may not be provided. In the display control board 16, for example, the display control CPU 140 executes a program read from the ROM 141, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU 140 reads fixed data from the ROM 141, the display control CPU 140 writes various variation data to the RAM 142 and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU 140 stores the RAM 142 in the RAM 142. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading various variation data temporarily stored, display operation CPU 140 receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from outside of display control board 16 via I / O 144, display control CPU 140 I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board 16 via O144 is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU 140, for example, based on the display control command from the effect control board 12 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12, the process of step S593 shown in FIG. By executing the process of step S595, it is determined whether or not to perform an effect operation that becomes a notice effect during variable display of decorative symbols, and determination of which of a plurality of kinds of effect operations that become a notice effect. You may make it perform. Alternatively, the display control CPU 140 performs the processing in steps S504, S505, and S506 shown in FIG. 62, the processing in steps S510, S512, and S513 shown in FIG. 63, the processing in step S558 shown in FIG. 64, and the step S576 shown in FIG. All or part of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by executing at least a portion of the processing of May be determined. The display control CPU 140 may execute any part of the processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. The sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal and an electrical decoration signal from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Further, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12 so that independent control to be the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 is performed. The substrate may not be provided. In the above embodiment, in the configuration shown in FIG. 5, the sound control board 13 or the lamp control board 14 is not equipped with a microcomputer including a control CPU or the like, and the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. Thus, processing for controlling various effects such as output control of sound and sound effects and lighting control of lamps, decoration LEDs, and the like is performed. On the other hand, in the configuration shown in FIG. 5, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above-described embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 or the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is performed. Any part of them may be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 or the like, is executed on any control board. Any combination may be used.

  In the above embodiment, in the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 13, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination for the jackpot type of “surprise” The case where -1 is not assigned has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2- for determining the big hit type with respect to the big hit types of “fourth probability variation” and “surprise”. 1 may be assigned. In this case, depending on whether the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, a random number MR2 for determining the big hit type assigned to the big hit types of “fourth probability variation” and “sudden probability” The number of jackpot types is determined based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, and the jackpot type is determined based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. The ratio at which the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability variation” or “surprise accuracy” may be different depending on whether the type is determined as one of the types.

  In the above embodiment, the variation patterns classified by the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the variable display state of the decorative symbol in the reach state in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. The table data has been described as being configured so that it can be determined as one of the types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the table can be determined as any one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of a predetermined effect operation such as a specific effect of “Development Opportunity” and a promotion effect during change. Data may be configured.

  In the above embodiment, it has been described that in the start winning memory display area 5H, blue display is performed when the first start condition is satisfied, and red display is performed when the second start condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a round symbol is displayed when the first starting condition is satisfied, and a triangular symbol is displayed when the second starting condition is satisfied. The symbol may be displayed. Alternatively, a number indicating the number of times each of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied may be displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the above embodiment, when the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern in step S276 shown in FIG. 50, the presence / absence of a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is determined, and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation is “1”- It has been described that it is determined as one of “3”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence / absence of the specific effect of the “pseudo ream” is determined on the main substrate 11 side, for example, when the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern in step S276, Regarding the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation, on the side of the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control board CPU 120 refers to a predetermined specific effect pattern determination table in step S554 in FIG. Depending on the determination, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation may be set to any one of “1” to “3”.

  In the above-described embodiment, whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation, etc., the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”. Depending on whether the decision was made to be one of “third probability variation”, “fourth probability variation” or “surprise accuracy”, the jackpot type is “fourth probability variation”. In the above description, it is assumed that the ratio is determined at the same rate when it is determined as “Accuracy”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, whether the jackpot type has been determined to be one of “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “third probability variation”. Whether the specific effect is executed at a different rate depending on whether the decision is made to be “fourth probability change” or “surprise accuracy”, and whether any of the specific effects of “slip”, “pseudo train”, or “intro” It is also possible to determine whether or not the big hit type is determined as “fourth probability change” and when it is determined as “surprising accuracy”. In this way, depending on whether a specific effect of “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, or “intro” is executed, or none of them is executed, the player will be in a big hit state for 15 rounds or 2 rounds. It will be easier to predict in advance whether it will be a big hit or a 15-round big hit, but it will be difficult to predict whether it will be a 2-round big hit or a 15-round big hit. It is possible to improve the interest of games during the variable display of symbols.

  In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice pattern type in step S593 shown in FIG. 66, after determining the notice pattern type including the presence or absence of the notice effect, the notice is notified in step S596. In the case of determining the pattern, the description has been given on the assumption that the notification pattern is determined including the presence or absence of the notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence / absence of the notice effect, the type of the notice pattern and the decision of the notice pattern may be determined in a single process. If it is determined that there is an effect, the type of the notice effect may be determined.

  In the above embodiment, when the production control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol of the reach combination in step S506 shown in FIG. 62, it stops in alignment with the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The decorative symbols to be displayed are determined, and the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. It was explained that the difference in design was also determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol display area 5C stops display, and the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R stop display. For example, the CPU 103 may determine the design difference from the decorative design on the main board 11 side along with the determination of the variation pattern, and notify the effect control board 12 side by a predetermined effect control command.

  In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol of the non-reach combination in step S505 shown in FIG. 62, refer to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left and right appearance determination table 161. In the above description, the determined decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are individually determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after determining the fixed decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the determined decorative symbol and the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas are displayed. You may make it determine the symbol difference with the fixed decoration symbol in 5C, 5R with reference to a predetermined | prescribed determination table.

  In the above embodiment, when executing the changing promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 as shown in FIG. 38 in step S576 shown in FIG. When the symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 are determined so that the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 become the determined decorative symbols that constitute the normal jackpot combination, the determined decorative A description has been given assuming that a normal symbol different from the symbol can be determined as a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 become a fixed ornament symbol constituting a normal jackpot combination, the same normal symbol as the fixed ornament symbol However, it may be determined as a decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing promotion effect. As an example, in the temporary stop symbol determination table 169, any of the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 is displayed. In the case of the above, all of the random numbers SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the promotion effect are assigned to any of the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” that are the same as the final stop symbol. The table data only needs to be configured so that the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 are the same as the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3. .

  In the above embodiment, as the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 47, the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 50 is executed regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied, a process different from each other is executed, and the variation pattern type is selected from a plurality of types. It is also possible to determine whether or not one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In this case, the process for determining the variation pattern type and the process for determining the variation pattern are varied depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while the variation pattern type The numerical data indicating the random number value SR3 for determination and the numerical data indicating the random value SR4 for determining the variation pattern are common numerical data regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. May be used.

  For example, as a variation pattern type determination table such as a big hit variation pattern type determination table, a small hit variation pattern type determination table, a reach variation pattern type determination table, or a non-reach variation pattern type determination table, the first start condition and the second Depending on which of the start conditions is satisfied, the allocation of the random value SR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type may be prepared in advance. In the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the first start condition, a variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the establishment of the first start condition is selected as a use table, and a random value for determining the variation pattern type is selected. Based on SR3, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types. On the other hand, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the second start condition, a variation pattern type determination table that is different from the case where the first start condition is established according to the establishment of the second start condition. As a use table, the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types based on the random value SR3 for variation pattern type determination common to the case where the first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, regarding the determination processing for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state, different processing is executed when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied. It may be. In this case, the process for determining whether or not to reach the reach state is made different depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while the numerical data indicating the reach determination random value MR2-2. For example, the common numerical data may be used regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Further, for example, instead of the process in step S249 shown in FIG. 49 in the above embodiment, as a process of determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types, the case where the first start condition is satisfied and the second start condition Different processing may be executed depending on whether or not is established. In this case, the processing for determining the jackpot type is different depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, while the numerical data indicating the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type For example, the common numerical data may be used regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied.

  In the above-described embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the game state is not changed after the small hit game state ends. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state based on the fact that the big hit type becomes “surprise”, and after the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the positive change state. Explained as being. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accurate” or the variable display result is “small hit”, A case of “suddenly normal” may be provided. As an example, “suddenly short time” and “suddenly normal” are included in the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. In this case, the jackpot type determination table 131 includes table data that assigns the random value MR2-1 for jackpot type determination to the jackpot type “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” in accordance with the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that it may be. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the jackpot type is “surprise”, the normal state is controlled. Thereby, a player's expectation with respect to the gaming state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  When such “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” are provided, a variation pattern type and variation pattern different from those other than “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” may be determined. As a result, although the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal”, the same effect operation as in the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is performed despite being controlled to the 2 round big hit state. It can prevent the player from feeling distrust. In addition, when the big hit type is "Suddenly short" or "Suddenly normal", when the variable display result is "Small hit", or when the big hit type is "Sudden", the common variation pattern type It may be possible to make a decision. As a result, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”, or the variable display result is “Small hit” or the big hit type is “Abrupt”. Regardless of whether this is the case, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the game state such as the probability change state or the time-short state can be controlled after the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “big hit”. In the probability variation state and the short-time state, it is described that the control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning opening and easily establishing the second start condition. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the probability variation state, the probability variation control is continuously performed, and the advantageous release control that increases the possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening is performed. The high base state and the high probability low base state in which the probability variation control is performed but the advantageous release control is not performed may be included. Also, in the short-time state, a low-accuracy base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened and advantageous opening control is performed, and a low-accuracy low-base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened but advantageous opening control is not performed. May be included. As an example, depending on whether the jackpot type is “1st probability variation” to “4th probability variation” or “surprise probability”, the high-accuracy high base state and the high-accuracy low base state are It may be controlled either. As another example, depending on whether the big hit type is “1st probability variation” to “4th probability variation” or “surprise probability”, the high probability high base state and the high probability low base state are You may make it make the ratio controlled to either differ mutually.

  When the big hit type is “Crush Probability”, when determining the variation pattern type to be one of multiple types, whether to control to the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends Accordingly, different variation pattern types may be determined. As an example, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” in step S249 shown in FIG. 49, it is determined whether to control to the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state is finished. A determination process is performed to At this time, when it is determined to control to the high-accuracy low base state, the big hit type such as the special CA4-1, the special CB4-1, and the special CC4-1 variation pattern type is “surprise”. A common variation pattern type is determined when the variable display result is “small hit”. On the other hand, when it is decided to control to the high accuracy and high base state, special CA4-2, special CA4-3, special CB4-2, special CB4-3, special CC4-2, special CC4- Only when the big hit type is “surprise”, such as 3, it is sufficient to determine the dedicated variation pattern type. As a result, when the big hit type is “surprise” and the high probability low base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, the variable display result is displayed as an effect operation during variable display of the decorative pattern or an effect operation in the two round big hit state. After the production operation common to the case of “small hit” is performed, the highly accurate and low base state can be obtained. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise” and the high hit high base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, the big hit type is “first” as the stage action during the variable display of the decorative pattern or the stage action in the two round big hit state. After the effect operation during the variable display of the decorative pattern in the case of “4 probability change” and the effect operation common to the effect operation during the big hit state, the high-accuracy high-base state can be obtained.

  In the above-described embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are described as being prepared as separate effect control commands. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to specify a variation pattern and a variable display result (any one of “losing”, “small hit”, “big hit”, and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). One kind of effect control command may be used. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands.

  In the above embodiment, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 in step S249 shown in FIG. 49 selects one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”. Based on the determination, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 sets the jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 33B in step S606 shown in FIG. 67, and step S608. In S609, it has been described that it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the determination whether to execute the jackpot promotion effect may be performed by the effect control CPU 120 regardless of the determination result in the CPU 103.

  In the above embodiment, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided in the display area of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided. In the above description, it is assumed that one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so that the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed on one predetermined effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three locations of “upper”, “middle”, and “lower” are provided. It is also possible that the decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed, and the finalized decorative symbols that will be the final stopped symbols are stopped and displayed on five or eight active lines.

  In the above embodiment, the specific effect is executed in response to the fact that the variation pattern type is determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-3 based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. It has been described as being determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7. That is, it has been described that the presence or absence of the specific effect is determined by determining the variation pattern type using the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the presence or absence of the specific effect may be determined by determining the variation pattern using the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. As an example, the table data of the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is set so that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-3 include the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-1. In this case, when the variation pattern type is determined to be the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-3 variation pattern type based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the presence / absence of the specific effect is not yet determined. On the other hand, the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach PA1-1 based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, while it is determined not to execute the specific effect, while the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach. Execution of a specific effect is determined by being determined as one of PA1-7.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the movable display device 50 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. However, the movable display device 50 may be applied to a slot machine as a gaming machine. For example, in a slot machine having a winning variable display section and an effect variable display section as in the gaming machine according to claim 2, the normal position not overlapping the effect variable display section and the effect variable display section You may make it provide the movable display apparatus (movable display means) of the structure similar to the said embodiment provided with the display screen (display part) which can be changed in the overlapping position used as the overlapping position. Then, when the display screen is in an overlapping position, a notice effect that suggests that the display screen may be in an advantageous state for the player such as “bonus is won internally” may be executed. Good. Thus, the present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the same configuration as the gaming machine described in claim 2, it is determined by the prize predetermining means that the generation of the specific prize is permitted, and the specific prize display result is displayed in the variable display part for prize. When not derived, a carry-over means for carrying over the decision to allow the occurrence of the specific winning after the next game may be provided. In such a configuration, even if the specific winning display result is not derived to the winning variable display unit, the decision to allow the specific winning is carried over after the next game. This can prevent the player from losing money.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the same configuration as the gaming machine described in claim 2, the notice effect may be performed by the effect variable display unit, or another device ( For example, it may be configured to be performed by a display device, a movable member, or the like. When the variable display of the production identification information and the announcement production are executed by the same production variable display unit, the display becomes complicated, the announcement production is difficult to recognize, and the player may be confused. Therefore, when the notice effect is configured to be performed by another device (for example, a display device, a movable member, etc.) different from the effect variable display unit, the player can easily recognize the notice effect. An effect can be obtained.

  Note that, in a gaming machine having the same configuration as the gaming machine described in claim 2, the period from the start of variable display of the effect identification information by the effect variable display control means until the display result is derived and displayed. May be within one game, or may be performed over a period of multiple games.

  Note that the gaming machine having the configuration described in claim 1 is preferably applied to a pachinko machine, and the gaming machine having a configuration described in claim 2 is preferably applied to a slot machine.

  In the embodiment described above, for example, the operation button 30 is provided to change the display of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, but the operation performed by the player In the gaming machine (for example, slot machine) that stops the variable display of the winning identification information in accordance with the operation target for stopping the variable display of the winning identification information and the operation target for changing the display of the effect image It may be realized by the same operation means. That is, the display of the effect image may be changed in accordance with an operation performed on the operation means provided to stop the variable display of the winning identification information. In such a configuration, in the gaming machine that stops the variable display of the winning identification information according to the operation performed by the player, there is no need to provide the operation button 30 or the like in order to change the display of the effect image.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is a six-sided view of a movable display device. It is a figure which shows the structure of a movable display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of a movable display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eyes, the development chance eyes, and the chances of surprise. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a specific production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a promotion production | presentation execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the notice pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data holding area for production control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big prize opening opening pre-processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of an opening | release control pattern, and the opening setting example of a special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding memory increase display process. It is a figure which shows the operation example in a pending | holding memory | storage display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a change promotion effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect process during jackpot control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an ending effect process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the example of a display operation in a special symbol display apparatus and an image display apparatus, and the example of the opening / closing operation | movement in a special variable winning ball apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the example of a display operation in a special symbol display apparatus and an image display apparatus, and the example of the opening / closing operation | movement in a special variable winning ball apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the example of a display operation in a special symbol display apparatus and an image display apparatus, and the example of the opening / closing operation | movement in a special variable winning ball apparatus. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus, and the example of the opening / closing operation | movement in a special variable winning ball apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of opening setting of the big winning opening in the opening control pattern of a modification. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the display operation example in the image display apparatus of a modification, and the opening / closing operation example in a special variable prize-ball apparatus. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the display operation example in the image display apparatus of a modification, and the opening / closing operation example in a special variable prize-ball apparatus. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the display operation example in the image display apparatus of a modification, and the opening / closing operation example in a special variable prize-ball apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot classification determination table in a modification. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the example of a transition of a gaming state, and the example of a display operation in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect pattern determination table in 15 times open | released. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the decoration symbol fluctuation | variation end in a modification. It is a figure which shows the structural examples, such as various control boards in a modification.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 16 ... Display control board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Operation button 50 ... Movable display device 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121, 141 for game control ROM
102, 122, 142 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124, 143... Random number circuits 105, 125, 144... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 140 ... Display control CPU

Claims (7)

A variable display unit is provided that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified based on the establishment of a start condition and displays a display result, and the display result of the identification information of the variable display unit is predetermined. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the specified display result is obtained,
Predetermining means for deciding whether to control to the specific gaming state based on the establishment of the start condition before the display result is derived and displayed;
Based on the determination result by the prior determination means, variable display pattern determination means for determining the variable display pattern of the identification information to any one of a plurality of types;
Variable display executing means for executing variable display of the identification information in the variable display section based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means;
A notice effect executing means for executing a notice effect for notifying that a display result becomes a predetermined display result during the variable display;
In the period from the start of variable display of identification information executed based on the variable display pattern to the derivation display of display results, the variable display in the variable display unit is temporarily stopped and then restarted once again. Or a re- variable display control means for performing a plurality of times,
A movable display that includes a display unit and is movable so that the display unit can be changed between a normal position that does not overlap the front side of the variable display unit and an overlapping position that overlaps the front side of the variable display unit. Means,
Movable control means for controlling the movement of the movable display means,
The movable control unit changes the display unit to the overlapping position before the re-variable display control unit executes the re-variable display, and when the variable display is temporarily stopped, the display unit is moved to the normal position. Return to the position, and after the re-variable display is executed, execute the control to change the display unit to the overlapping position again,
The informational display execution means gaming machine, wherein said is capable of executing the announcement attraction in the display unit when the display unit before and after the re-variable display is in said overlapping position. A winning variable display unit that can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game medium, and variably displays a plurality of types of winning identification information that can be distinguished from each other. A game in which one game is completed when the display result is derived, and a prize can be generated according to the display result derived in the variable display unit for winning,
A prize for determining whether or not to allow the generation of each of a plurality of types of prizes including a specific prize accompanying a transition to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player before the display result of the variable display unit for winning is derived. Pre-determining means,
In accordance with the determination result of the award predetermination means, a winning derivation control means for controlling the winning variable display section to derive a display result;
Specific game state control means for controlling to the specific game state when a specific prize display result corresponding to the specific prize is derived to the variable display unit for winning;
A variable display unit for production that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information for production that can identify each of them,
The suggestion effect means for suggesting that the transition condition for shifting to a state advantageous to the player is established by the display result of the effect identification information in the effect variable display unit being a predetermined special display result. When,
Whether or not to make the special display result, a pre-decision unit for production that decides before the display result of the identification information for production is derived and displayed,
Based on the determination result of the effect predetermining means, variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern of the effect identification information as any one of a plurality of types;
An effect variable display control means for executing variable display of the effect identification information based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means,
Notice effect executing means for executing a notice effect for notifying that the display result becomes a predetermined display result during variable display of the effect identification information;
Between the start of variable display of the effect identification information executed based on the variable display pattern and the display result derivation display, the variable display on the effect variable display unit is temporarily stopped and then restarted. and re-variable display control means for causing one or more times a variable display,
A display unit is provided and moved to change a normal position that does not overlap the front side of the effect variable display unit and an overlapping position that overlaps the front side of the effect variable display unit. Possible movable display means;
Movable control means for controlling the movement of the movable display means,
The movable control unit changes the display unit to the overlapping position before the re-variable display control unit executes the re-variable display, and when the variable display is temporarily stopped, the display unit is moved to the normal position. Return to the position, and after the re-variable display is executed, execute the control to change the display unit to the overlapping position again,
The informational display execution means gaming machine, wherein said is capable of executing the announcement attraction in the display unit when the display unit before and after the re-variable display is in said overlapping position. The movable display means is
A base portion fixed to the gaming machine;
A support member for supporting the display unit;
A guide member that guides the support member to be movable in a predetermined direction;
A movable first arm and a second arm pivotally supported by a substantially intermediate connecting shaft;
First and second movement fulcrums provided on the support member and movably supporting one end of each of the first and second arms;
A first fixed fulcrum and a second fixed fulcrum, which are provided on the pedestal, and movably support the other ends of the first and second arms;
A transmission member fixed to the connecting shaft;
A drive member for driving the transmission member in the predetermined direction,
By operating the transmission member, the first and second arms and the support member operate, and the display unit can be changed to the normal position and the overlapping position,
It said movable control means, gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that to control the movable of the movable display device by controlling the driving of said drive member. The transmission member is provided in front of the display unit,
The gaming machine according to claim 3 , wherein the display unit includes a connector unit to which wiring can be connected on the back side of the display unit. The base part has a wiring fixing part for fixing the wiring,
The wire is fixed by the wiring fixing portion is connected to said connector portion via the wire fixing portion,
Only the wiring between the said wiring fixing | fixed part and the said connector part is movable with the change of the said overlapping position from the said normal position of the said display part. The gaming machine of Claim 4 characterized by the above-mentioned. The display unit, the in the normal position located below the variable display portion or the effect variable display unit, 5 claims 3 raised by the drive of said drive member, characterized in that the said overlapping position The gaming machine according to any one of the above. A rolling surface on which a game ball used for gaming of a gaming machine can roll is further provided below the front surface of the variable display unit or the production variable display unit.
The display unit is provided between the variable display unit or the production variable display unit and the rolling surface,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 3 to 6 , wherein the transmission member is provided in front of the display unit and below the rolling surface.